Huawei OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System V100R002C00
IDU Hardware Description

Issue Date 03 2010-01-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 910 iManager U2000 Version V100R002C00 V100R001C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l l l l l l
Network planning engineer Hardware installation engineer Installation and commissioning engineer Field maintenance engineer Data configuration engineer System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l l
Basics of digital microwave communication Basics of the OptiX RTN 910
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
GUI Conventions
Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

This document is the third release of the V100R002C00 version. The updated contents are as follows. Section 3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card 3.5.2 Functions and Features Description Modifies the sequence of high-order bits and lower-order bits of DIP switches. Deletes specifications for VC-4 loopbacks on the IF1 board.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
iv
Update History
Section 5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment
Description Adds descriptions of requirements for the diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable, types of coaxial connectors, and crimp pliers. Fixes known bugs.

This document is the second release of the V100R002C00 version. The updated contents are as follows. Section D Glossary E Acronyms and Abbreviations Description Adds certain terms. Adds certain abbreviations and acronyms.

This document is the first release of the V100R002C00 version.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Configuration Modes.......................................................................................................................................1-6
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2 2.3 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-2
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3 3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4 3.3 CSTA...............................................................................................................................................................3-8 3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-9 3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-9 3.3.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-11 3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-13 3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-22 3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-25 3.3.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-25 3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-26 3.3.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-26 3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.....................................................................................................................................3-30 3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-30 3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-30 3.4.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-33 3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-37 3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-50 3.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-53 3.4.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-54 3.4.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-54 3.4.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-54 Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
3.5 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-59 3.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-60 3.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-60 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-61 3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-66 3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-68 3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-69 3.5.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-69 3.6 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-70 3.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-71 3.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-71 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-72 3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-76 3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-78 3.6.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-79 3.6.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-79 3.7 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-80 3.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-81 3.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-81 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-83 3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-87 3.7.5 Valid Slot..............................................................................................................................................3-89 3.7.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-90 3.7.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-90 3.8 EM6T/EM6F.................................................................................................................................................3-91 3.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-92 3.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-92 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-94 3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-97 3.8.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-101 3.8.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-102 3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-102 3.8.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-102 3.9 SL1D...........................................................................................................................................................3-104 3.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-105 3.9.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-105 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-106 3.9.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-109 3.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-111 3.9.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-111 3.9.7 Parameter Settings..............................................................................................................................3-112 3.9.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-112 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Contents
3.10 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-113 3.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-114 3.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-114 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-115 3.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-117 3.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-121 3.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-122 3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-122 3.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-122 3.11 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-123 3.11.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-123 3.11.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-123 3.11.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-124 3.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-125 3.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-126 3.11.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-126 3.12 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-127 3.12.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-127 3.12.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-127 3.12.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-128 3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-129 3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-130 3.12.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-130
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.1 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-5 4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-4 5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable........................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.4 XPIC Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7 5.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9 5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment .....................................................................................................5-9 5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel......................................................................................................................5-13 5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable...................................................................................................................................5-14 5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-16 Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-17
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Parameters for NE Management....................................................................................................................A-3 A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching..................................................................................................A-3 A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation....................................................................................................A-7 A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs.............................................................A-10 A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization............................................................................A-11 A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time..................................................A-13 A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management..................................................................A-14 A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs..............................................A-16 A.2 Parameters for Cable Management..............................................................................................................A-17 A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search..................................................................................................A-17 A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation...............................................................................................A-19 A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation.....................................................................................A-20 A.3 Parameters for Communications Management............................................................................................A-22 A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting.........................................................A-23 A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration..............................................A-24 A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.............A-25 A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC........................................A-27 A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management..........................................................................A-28 A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management..............................A-30 A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation................A-31 A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings..........................A-32 A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP......................................................................A-34 A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter............................................A-35 A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table...............................................................A-36 A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel...................................................................A-37 A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management............................................A-41 A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting.................................................................A-42 A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting..........................................................A-43 A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control............................................................................................A-44 A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control...................................................................................A-45 A.4 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-46 A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-47 A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-51 A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-58 A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-59 A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-60 A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-62 A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-65 A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-76 A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-76 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Contents
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-79 A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-82 A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-83 A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-85 A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services ......................................................................................................................................................................A-88 A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-91 A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control..................................................................................A-93 A.7 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................A-96 A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table.........................................................................A-97 A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet............................................................A-99 A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality..........................................................A-102 A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...............................................A-105 A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status........................................A-106 A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...............A-107 A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching....................................A-109 A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source......................A-110 A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status.....................................................................A-113 A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................A-114 A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation............................................................................A-115 A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service............................................................................................A-121 A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation...................................................A-126 A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation...........................................................................A-126 A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service...........................................................................................A-132 A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation...................................................................................A-144 A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters....................................................................................................................A-144 A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation.....................................................................A-145 A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management.....................................................................................A-147 A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation................................................A-153 A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration.......................................A-155 A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters..................................................A-155 A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters.....................................................A-161 A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST....................A-163 A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration...........................A-171 A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted........A-174 A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management...............................A-175 A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation...................A-176 A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management.........A-176 A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation ....................................................................................................................................................................A-178 A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics.......................................A-178 A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation........................A-180 A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority.................................................A-185 Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation.....................................................................A-186 A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation...........................................................................A-187
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM...........................................................................................................A-188 A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation....A-188 A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation ....................................................................................................................................................................A-189 A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation..............................A-190 A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation.................A-191 A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation................................A-192 A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling.................................A-193 A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling.................................A-194 A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter................................A-196 A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring..........A-199 A.11 QoS Parameters.......................................................................................................................................A-200 A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management.................................................................A-201 A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create....................................................A-206 A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification..........................................A-211 A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management..................................................................................A-213 A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy................................................................................................A-218 A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration.....................................A-223 A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation........................................................A-232 A.12 RMON Parameters..................................................................................................................................A-233 A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.....................................................A-234 A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group........................................................A-235 A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group..........................................A-236 A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting......................................................A-237 A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-239 A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-239 A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-241 A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-242 A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-242 A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-243 A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces..............................................................................................................A-246 A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute..........................................................................A-247 A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute....................................................................A-249 A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration........................................................................A-251 A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records......................................................................A-253 A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test................................................................................................A-254 A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute.............................................A-255 A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes.............................................................A-256 A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information...................................................A-261 A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes.......................................................A-262 A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-263 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Contents
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................A-265 A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-266 A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes........................................................A-268 A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control............................................................A-271 A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes....................................................A-272 A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes................................................A-276 A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes...................................................A-278 A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................A-279 A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes............................................A-281 A.15 Parameters for Overhead.........................................................................................................................A-283 A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead.................................................................A-284 A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs...............................................................................................A-284 A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs.............................................................................................A-286
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1 C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards..................................................C-1 D Glossary.....................................................................................................................................D-1 E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
xiii
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910........................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910......................................1-3 Figure 1-3 IDU 910..............................................................................................................................................1-4 Figure 1-4 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6 Figure 1-5 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6 Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910........................................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels..........................................................................................................2-4 Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)...................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA............................................................................................3-11 Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-12 Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA..................................................................................................................3-14 Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector...................................................................................................3-16 Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface............................3-17 Figure 3-9 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-20 Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-23 Figure 3-11 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-25 Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA...........................................................................3-25 Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram ..............................................................................................................3-34 Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-36 Figure 3-15 Front panel of the CSHA................................................................................................................3-37 Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHB................................................................................................................3-38 Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHC................................................................................................................3-38 Figure 3-18 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-42 Figure 3-19 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface..........................3-43 Figure 3-20 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface........................................................................................3-48 Figure 3-21 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-51 Figure 3-22 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis.....................................................................3-53 Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA...........................................................................3-53 Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB...........................................................................3-53 Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC...........................................................................3-54 Figure 3-26 Functional block diagram of the IF1..............................................................................................3-62 Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv
Figures
OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-66 Figure 3-28 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-68 Figure 3-29 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1................................................................................3-68 Figure 3-30 Functional block diagram of the IFU2........................................................................................... 3-73 Figure 3-31 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-76 Figure 3-32 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-78 Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2.............................................................................3-79
Figure 3-34 Functional block diagram of the IFX2........................................................................................... 3-83 Figure 3-35 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-87 Figure 3-36 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-89 Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-90 Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram...............................................................................................................3-95 Figure 3-39 Front panel of the EM6T................................................................................................................3-97 Figure 3-40 Front panel of the EM6F................................................................................................................ 3-97 Figure 3-41 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-99 Figure 3-42 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-101 Figure 3-43 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F..............................................................3-101 Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-107 Figure 3-45 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-109 Figure 3-46 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-111 Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D..........................................................................3-111 Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-115 Figure 3-49 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-117 Figure 3-50 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-117 Figure 3-51 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-119 Figure 3-52 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis.........................................................................3-121 Figure 3-53 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910.............................................................................3-121 Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-124 Figure 3-55 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-125 Figure 3-56 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis..............................................................................................3-126 Figure 3-57 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU................................................................................3-126 Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-128 Figure 3-59 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-129 Figure 3-60 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-130 Figure 3-61 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN...............................................................................3-130 Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU.......................................................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU................................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode ....................................................................................4-7 Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode .....................................................................................4-7 Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3 xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Figures
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5 Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-9 E1 cable............................................................................................................................................5-10 Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel..............................................................................5-13 Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors.............................................5-15 Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable..............................................................................................................................5-17 Figure 5-13 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-19
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
xvii
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910.................................................................................................................1-3 Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910.............................................................................1-4 Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910..........................................................................1-5 Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910.........................................................................................1-7 Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3 Table 3-1 List of IDUs..........................................................................................................................................3-4 Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................3-14 Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.................................................. 3-15 Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface...................................................................................... 3-16 Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface................................................................................................. 3-16 Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..................................................................3-17 Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface........................................................................................3-18 Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface................................................................................................3-19 Table 3-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface..................................................................................3-19 Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-19 Table 3-11 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA..........................................................................3-20 Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-21 Table 3-13 Setting the DIP switches.................................................................................................................. 3-23 Table 3-14 Board feature code of the CSTA......................................................................................................3-26 Table 3-15 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-26 Table 3-16 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-27 Table 3-17 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-27 Table 3-18 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-28 Table 3-19 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-28 Table 3-20 Clock timing and synchronization performance.............................................................................. 3-29 Table 3-21 Wayside service interface performance........................................................................................... 3-29 Table 3-22 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-29 Table 3-23 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB..........................................................................3-38 Table 3-24 Description of the indicators on the CSHC......................................................................................3-39 Table 3-25 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces................................................ 3-41 Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface.................................................................................... 3-42 Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the EXT interface............................................................................................... 3-42 Table 3-28 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector................................................................3-43 Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix
Tables
OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface......................................................................................3-44 Table 3-30 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface..............................................................................................3-45 Table 3-31 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface................................................................................3-45 Table 3-32 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-45 Table 3-33 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB..............................................................3-46 Table 3-34 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC..........................................................................3-46 Table 3-35 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-47 Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode.................................................................3-47 Table 3-37 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-48 Table 3-38 Setting the DIP switches..................................................................................................................3-51 Table 3-39 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC..............................................................................3-54 Table 3-40 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-55 Table 3-41 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-55 Table 3-42 FE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-56 Table 3-43 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-56 Table 3-44 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-57 Table 3-45 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-57 Table 3-46 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-57 Table 3-47 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-58 Table 3-48 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-58 Table 3-49 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-58 Table 3-50 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-59 Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1...............................................................3-62 Table 3-52 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1.............................................................3-65 Table 3-53 Description of the indicators on the IF1...........................................................................................3-66 Table 3-54 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-67 Table 3-55 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-69 Table 3-56 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-69 Table 3-57 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-70 Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-70 Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2............................................................3-73 Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2..........................................................3-75 Table 3-61 Description of the indicators on the IFU2........................................................................................3-76 Table 3-62 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-78 Table 3-63 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-79 Table 3-64 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-79 Table 3-65 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-80 Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-80 Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2............................................................3-84 Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2..........................................................3-86 Table 3-69 Description of the indicators on the IFX2........................................................................................3-87 Table 3-70 Description of the interfaces............................................................................................................3-89
xx
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Tables
Table 3-71 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-90 Table 3-72 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-90 Table 3-73 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-91 Table 3-74 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-91 Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction............................................................................... 3-95 Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction..............................................................................3-96 Table 3-77 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.......................................................................... 3-97 Table 3-78 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F...........................................................................3-99 Table 3-79 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-99 Table 3-80 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode...............................................................3-100 Table 3-81 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..............................................................3-101 Table 3-82 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-101 Table 3-83 Board feature code of the EM6F....................................................................................................3-102 Table 3-84 Performance of the GE optical interface .......................................................................................3-102 Table 3-85 GE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-103 Table 3-86 FE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-103 Table 3-87 Mechanical behavior .....................................................................................................................3-104 Table 3-88 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D.........................................................3-107 Table 3-89 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D.......................................................3-108 Table 3-90 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.....................................................................................3-109 Table 3-91 Description of the interfaces .........................................................................................................3-110 Table 3-92 Slot allocation for the SL1D..........................................................................................................3-111 Table 3-93 Board feature code of the SL1D.....................................................................................................3-112 Table 3-94 STM-1 optical interface performance............................................................................................3-112 Table 3-95 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-113 Table 3-96 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................3-115 Table 3-97 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D.............................................3-116 Table 3-98 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D...........................................................................3-118 Table 3-99 Description of the interface on the SP3S.......................................................................................3-118 Table 3-100 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D...................................................................................3-118 Table 3-101 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-119 Table 3-102 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-121 Table 3-103 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-122 Table 3-104 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-122 Table 3-105 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-123 Table 3-106 Description of the power status indicators ..................................................................................3-125 Table 3-107 Description of the interfaces on the PIU......................................................................................3-126 Table 3-108 Technical specifications...............................................................................................................3-127 Table 3-109 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-129 Table 3-110 Description of the fan status indicators........................................................................................3-130 Table 3-111 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-131 Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2 Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi
Tables
OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3 Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU..........................................................................................................................4-5 Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable.........................................................................................................5-3 Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7 Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-10 Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12 Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel............................5-14 Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors..........5-15 Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable...............................................................................................5-17 Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface.................................................................................................5-17 Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface.............................................................................................5-18 Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable...................................................................................5-19 Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable.............................................................................................5-19 Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-275 Table A-2 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-280 Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards........................................................B-1 Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................C-1 Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB............................................................................C-2 Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC........................................................................................C-3 Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1.............................................................................................C-5 Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2..........................................................................................C-6 Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.............................................................................C-7 Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.........................................................................................C-9 Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D................................................................................C-9 Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX........................................................................................C-10 Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators ....................................................................................C-10 Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators..........................................................................................C-11 Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards.....................................................................................C-11
xxii
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
1 Introduction
1
About This Chapter
Introduction
The OptiX RTN 910 is one of the series products of the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system. 1.1 Network Application The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication network or private network. 1.2 Components The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910, the ODU, and the antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable. 1.3 Configuration Modes The OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring different control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements of different microwave application scenarios.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
1-1
1 Introduction
1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication network or private network. The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in two types: OptiX RTN 910 and OptiX RTN 950. The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards. The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards. The users can choose an appropriate type based on the actual requirements. The OptiX RTN 910 provides several types of service interfaces and facilitates installation and flexible configuration. It can provide a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports the smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybrid microwave to the Packet microwave. The solution can evolve based on the service changes that occur due to radio mobile network evolution. Thus, this solution can meet the transmission requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks. Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the TDM microwave transmission solution and the Hybrid microwave transmission solution respectively that are provided by the OptiX RTN 910 for the mobile communication network. Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910
E1 E1 E1
E1
E1
STM-1/E1 Regional Backhaul Network
E1
E1 E1 E1 E1
OptiX RTN 910
BTS
BSC
1-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
1 Introduction
Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910
FE FE E1 E1
E1 E1
STM-1/ E1 FE/GE
E1 Regional backhaul network GE
E1 FE FE E1
OptiX RTN 910
NodeB
BTS
RNC
BSC
NOTE
l l
In the solutions, the local backhaul network is optional. The OptiX RTN 910 can be connected to the RNC or the BSC directly. When the OptiX RTN 910 supports the microwaves in three directions or more, you can adopt the NE cascading mode or use the OptiX RTN 950, which is more powerful.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910, the ODU, and the antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 910
The IDU 910 is the indoor unit of an OptiX RTN 910 system. It accesses services, performs multiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control and communication function. Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 910. Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910 Item Chassis height Pluggable Number of microwave directions
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Performance 1U Supported 1-2
1-3
1 Introduction
Item RF configuration mode
Performance 1+0 non-protection configuration 2+0 non-protection configuration 1+1 protection configuration N+1 protection configuration (N = 1) XPIC configuration
Figure 1-3 IDU 910
ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 900. It performs frequency conversion and amplification of signals. The OptiX RTN 900 series products can uses the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering 6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band. Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910 Item Description Standard Power ODU ODU type Frequency band SP, SPA 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/38 GHz (SP ODU) 6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2 3 GHz (SPA ODU) High Power ODU HP 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/32/38 GHz Low Capacity for PDH ODU LP 7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz
1-4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
1 Introduction
Item
Description Standard Power ODU High Power ODU QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM Low Capacity for PDH ODU QPSK/16QAM
Microwave modulation mode
QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM (SP) QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM (SPA)
Channel spacing
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
7/14/28/56 MHz
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910 Item Description High Power ODU ODU type Frequency band Microwave modulation mode Channel spacing XMC-2 15/23 GHz QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/ 256QAM 7/14/28/56 MHz
Antenna
The OptiX RTN 910 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the singlepolarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system. There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate mounting.
l
The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and singlepolarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-4 shows the direct mounting method.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
1-5
1 Introduction
Figure 1-4 Direct mounting
The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-5 shows the separate method. In this situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom. Figure 1-5 Separate mounting
1.3 Configuration Modes

The OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring different control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements of different microwave application scenarios.
1-6
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
1 Introduction
Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910 Configuration Modes Type of the Control, Switching, and Timing Board CSTA Type of the IF Board Type of the ODU Main Application
PDH microwave equipment
IF1
Low capacity for PDH ODU
Providing a radio link whose capacity is not higher than 16xE1 Providing an STM-1 radio link or a highcapacity PDH radio link Providing a Hybrid radio link Providing a Hybrid radio link of the super capacity
SDH microwave equipment
CSTA
IF1
Standard power ODU or high power ODU
Hybrid microwave equipment XPIC Hybrid microwave equipment
CSHA/CSHB/ CSHC CSHA/CSHB/ CSHC
IFU2
Standard power ODU or high power ODU Standard power ODU or high power ODU
IFX2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
1-7
2 Chassis
2
About This Chapter
Chassis
The IDU of OptiX RTN 910 is a 1U chassis. It supports various installation modes and therefore can be deployed flexibly. 2.1 Chassis Structure The dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). The IDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling. 2.2 Installation Mode The IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly. 2.3 IDU Labels There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels, thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
2-1
2 Chassis
2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). The IDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling. Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 910. Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910
2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly. The IDU 910 can be installed:
l l l l l l l
In a 300 mm ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) cabinet In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet In an open rack On a wall On a table
2.3 IDU Labels

There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels, thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
2 Chassis
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels Label Label Name ESD protection label Description Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity. Indicates the grounding position of the IDU chassis. warns you not to touch the fan leaves when the fan is rotating. The board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. Indicates that the equipment is qualified. Indicates that the equipment complies with the related requirements specified in the RoHS directive.
Grounding label
Fan warning label
High temperature warning label
/QUALIFICATION CARD
Qualification card label
HUAWEI
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
RoHS label
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
2-3
2 Chassis
Label
Label Name Product nameplate label
Description Indicates the product name and certification.
Operation guidance label

PULL
The switch lever must be pulled outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
Label Position
Figure 2-2 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 910. Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels
OptiX RTN 910
Class 1 Laser Product
POWER RATING:
-48-60V;5A
/QUALIFICATION CARD
This device complies with Part15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject . to the following two conditions (1) this device may not cause harmful : interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received , including interference that may cause undesired operation .
HUAWEI
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
N 14036
MA DE IN CHINA
HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO ., LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
2-4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
3
About This Chapter
Boards
The IDU 910 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing board, IF board, Ethernet board, SDH board, PDH board, power supply board, and fan board. 3.1 Board Appearance The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect unit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm (width). 3.2 Board List The boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housing different types of boards. 3.3 CSTA The CSTA is an TDM system control, switching, and timing board. 3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication, switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are with regard to the types and number of service interfaces. 3.5 IF1 The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A and IF1B. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B. The only difference from the IF1B is that the IF1A is more reliable. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distribution modes. 3.6 IFU2 The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and Packet microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.7 IFX2 The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave and Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.8 EM6T/EM6F
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-1
3 Boards
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces and two GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces. 3.9 SL1D The SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board. 3.10 SP3S/SP3D The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. 3.11 PIU The PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies. 3.12 FAN The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.
3-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect unit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm (width).
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of the boards in the IDU 910 chassis. Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)
The appearance of the IFU2 is provided as an example. The front panel of the IFU2 has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers are used when the IFU2 is inserted or removed. The captive screws are used to fasten the IFU2. The bar code of the IFU2 is attached to one of the two ejector levers. Figure 3-2 shows the bar code of the IFU2. Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91SL1D01

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Internal code Board version Board name Board feature code

3-3
3 Boards
NOTE
The indication of the board feature code is related to the board type. The feature code of an optical interface board indicates the type of the optical interface on the board. The feature code of an E1 interface board indicates the impedance of the E1 interface on the board. For details about the board feature code, see the description of each board in this document.
3.2 Board List

The boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housing different types of boards. Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot Slot 5 6 (PIU) (FAN)
NOTE
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSTA/CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)
The EXT represents an extended slot, which can be inserted with various IF boards and interface boards.
Table 3-1 List of IDUs Board Name CSTA Full Spelling TDM control, switching, and timing board Valid Slot Slot 1 Description
l
Provides full timeslot cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s. Performs system communication and control. Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/output function. Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1 interfaces. Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical interfaces. Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, and threeinput and one-output external alarm interfaces.
3-4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Board Name CSHA
Full Spelling Hybrid control, switching, and timing board
Valid Slot Slot 1
Description
l
Provides full timeslot cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s. Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capability. Performs system communication and control. Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/output function. Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1 interfaces. Provides two FE electrical interfaces. Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are compatible with the FE electrical interface. Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, and threeinput and one-output external alarm interfaces.
l l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-5
3 Boards
Board Name CSHB
Valid Slot Slot 1
Description
l
Provides full timeslot cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s. Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capability. Performs system communication and control. Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/output function. Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1 interfaces. Provides two FE electrical interfaces. Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are compatible with the FE electrical interface. Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, and threeinput and one-output external alarm interfaces.
l l
3-6
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Board Name CSHC
Valid Slot Slot 1
Description
l
Provides full timeslot cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s. Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capability. Performs system communication and control. Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/output function. Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1 interfaces. Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical interfaces. Provides two FE electrical interfaces. Uses the SFP module to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces. Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, and threeinput and one-output external alarm interfaces. Provides one IF interface. Supports the TU-based PDH microwave solution and the STM-1-based SDH microwave solution. Provides one IF interface. Supports the Hybrid microwave solution. Supports AM. Provides one IF interface. Supports the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave. Supports the AM of the Hybrid microwave.
l l
IF1
SDH IF board
Slot 3 or slot 4
l l
IFU2
Universal IF board
Slot 3 or slot 4
l l l
IFX2
Universal XPIC IF board
Slot 3 or slot 4
l l
SL1D
2xSTM-1 interface board
Slot 3 or slot 4
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical interfaces.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-7
3 Boards
Board Name EM6T
Full Spelling 6 Port RJ45 Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet Interface Board 4 Port RJ45 + 2 Port SFP Fast Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet Interface Board 16xE1 tributary board 32xE1 tributary board Power board Fan board
Valid Slot Slot 3 or slot 4
Description
l l
Provides four FE electrical interfaces. Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are compatible with the FE electrical interface.
EM6F
l l
Provides four FE electrical interfaces. Uses the SFP module to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
SP3S
Slot 3 or slot 4 Slot 3 or slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6
Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1 interfaces. Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1 interfaces. Provides two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs. Cools and ventilates the IDU.
SP3D
TNC1PIU TNC1FAN
3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is an TDM system control, switching, and timing board. 3.3.1 Version Description The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1. 3.3.2 Functions and Features The CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces. 3.3.3 Working Principle The CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit. 3.3.4 Front Panel There are indicators, service interfaces, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons, and labels on the front panel. 3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
3 Boards
3.3.6 Valid Slots The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary slots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional unit on the CSTA. 3.3.7 Board Feature Code The E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name. 3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA. 3.3.9 Technical Specifications This topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDH optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.3.1 Version Description

The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.
3.3.2 Functions and Features

The CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.
Time Division Cross-Connection

l l
Grooms service signals between boards. Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
System Control and Communication

l
Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and the ODUs by using the NE software. Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control and communication unit. Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards. Communicates with the NMS and the other NEs and processes a maximum of seven DCCs. Cross-connects and processes overheads.
l l l
Clock Processing
l
Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals for the other boards. Supports one input and one output of the external clock.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-9
3 Boards
l
Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the system clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, microwave interface line clock, or tributary clock. Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message (SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol. Supports the detection of the states of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop. Supports the locked, holdover, and free-run modes.
l l
Service Interfaces
l l
Provides sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 service interfaces. Adopts the SFP optical modules and can provide two STM-1 optical interfaces.
Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces

l l l l l l l
Provides one Ethernet NM interface. Provides one NM serial interface. Provides one NE cascade interface. Provides one Orderwire interface. Provides one asynchronous data interface. Provides one synchronous data interface. Provides one three-input and one-output external alarm interface.
Protection Processing
l l l l
Performs the 1+1 protection switching. Performs the linear MSP switching. Performs the SNCP switching. Performs the clock protection switching.
Alarms and Performance Events

l l
Reports various alarms and performance events. Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the BER threshold. Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l l l
Supports the inloop and outloop over optical interfaces. Supports the outloop in VC-4 paths. Supports the board reset.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-10

l
3 Boards
Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the -48 V power supply. Checks the indicators on all the boards. Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions. Supports the query of the board manufacturing information. Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading prevention function. Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and backs up the configuration data. The backup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an onsite board replacement.
l l l l
3.3.3 Working Principle

The CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.
Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA
STM-1 signal processing unit E1 signal processing unit VC-4 signal VC-4 signal Backplane
SDH signal E1 signal
Cross-connect unit
VC-4 signal TDM service board
Control bus NM interface

NM serial interface
NE cascade interface
Asynchronous data interface Synchronous data interface External alarm interface
System control and communicatio n unit
Clock unit
Clock signal received from other boards Clock signal provided to other boards
Auxiliary interface unit
Orderwire interface
Clock interface
Clock source received from the service unit on the board
Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
External clock signal Supplies power to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
-48 V1 -48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied to other boards +12 V power supplied to the fans
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-11
3 Boards
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l
Controls and manages the other units on the CSTA, and also collects alarms and performance events through the control bus. Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance events through the control bus. Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM on the IF board. Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit. The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE cascade interface. The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the software. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads the FPGA software. The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:

l l
Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit. Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services. Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order crossconnect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM service unit HOXC Sink TDM service unit
LOXC
3-12
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order crossconnect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
E1 Signal Processing Unit

The E1 signal processing unit provides access to, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical signals, and also processes overheads. The signal processing flow on this unit is the same as the signal processing flow on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
STM-1 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1 signal processing unit provides access to STM-1 optical signals, extracts the clock signal, restores the data, scrambles/descrambles the data, processes overheads, and processes pointers. The signal processing flow on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as the signal processing flow on the SL1D. For details, see 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow of the SL1D.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a service interface according to the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals to other units on the system control and communication board and the other boards.
Auxiliary Interface Unit

The auxiliary interface unit processes the input and output of the Orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board. Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required by the other boards in the IDU. Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by the fan.
3.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, service interfaces, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons, and labels on the front panel.
3 Boards
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA
CSTA
1
STAT PROG SYNC SRV LOS1 LOS2
2 E1 1~16
STM-1 CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE
1. Indicators 4. STM-1 optical interfaces
2. Buttons 5. E1 (1-16) interface
3. Auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces
Indicators
Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CSTA Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
The board is not working. The board is not created. There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG
On for 100 ms (green) and off for 100 ms repeatedly On for 300 ms (green) and off for 300 ms repeatedly On (green) On for 100 ms (red) and off for 100 ms repeatedly On (red)
When the board is being powered on or being reset, the software is being loaded to the flash memory. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board software is in BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic file or upper layer software is lost. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
3-14
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning The software is running normally. The clock is normal. The clock source is lost or is switched. The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs on the board. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. The first optical interface on the line reports the R_LOS alarm. The first optical interface on the line does not report the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface on the line reports the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface on the line does not report the R_LOS alarm.
SYNC
On (green) On (red)
SRV
On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off
LOS1
On (red) Off
LOS2
On (red) Off

Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces Interface NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE CF RCV RST Description NM interface/NM serial interface NE cascade interface External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface Alarm input/output interface Orderwire interface CF configuration reset button Board warm reset button Connector Type
RJ-45
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-15
3 Boards
NOTE
The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface can transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data service overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clock interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte. The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent transmission of the orderwire byte.
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ-45 connector. Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector
87654321
Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface Interface Pin 1 2 3 4 NMS/COM 5 6 7 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Grounding end of the NM serial interface Receive end of the NM serial interface Receiving data (-) Not defined Transmit end of the NM serial interface
Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface Interface Pin 1 EXT 2 3
3-16
Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Interface
Pin 6 4, 5, 7, 8
Signal Receiving data (-) Not defined
NOTE
The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see Table 3-6. Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The interface is transmitting or receiving data. The interface is not transmitting or receiving data.
NOTE
The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise, an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed on the NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections. Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface
CSTA
STAT PROG SYNC SRV
MAJ LOS1 LOS2
CRIT MAJ MIN
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
E1 1~16
LAN
CSTA
STAT PROG SYNC SRV MAJ LOS1 LOS2
CRIT MAJ MIN
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
E1 1~16
The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is provided in Table 3-7.
3 Boards
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface Pin Working Mode Externa l Clock External Time Input (1 PPS + Time Informatio n) 1 CLK receivin g (-) CLK receivin g (+) Not defined Not defined External Time Output (1 PPS + Time Information) External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
1 PPS signal input (-) (RS-422 level)
1 PPS signal output (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end
DCLS time signal input (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end
DCLS time signal output (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end
CLK transmit ting (-) CLK transmit ting (+) Not defined
Grounding end Grounding end 1 PPS signal input (+) (RS-422 level)
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
1 PPS signal output (+) (RS-422 level) Time information output (-) (RS-422 level) Time information output (+) (RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal input (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined
DCLS time signal output (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined
Not defined
Time information input (-) (RS-422 level)
Not defined
Time information input (+) (RS-422 level)
Not defined
Not defined
3-18
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-8. Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface Interface F1/S1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Transmitting asynchronous data signals Grounding end Receiving asynchronous data signals Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP) Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING) Grounding end Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP) Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-9. Table 3-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface Interface ALMI/ ALMO Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal The first external alarm input signal Grounding end for the first alarm input signal The second external alarm input signal The third external alarm input signal Grounding end for the third alarm input signal Grounding end for the second alarm input signal The first external alarm output signal (+) The first external alarm output signal (-)
The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-10. Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface Interface PHONE Pin 1 2
Signal Not defined
3 Boards
Interface
Pin 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal
RING TIP Not defined
Service Interfaces
Table 3-11 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA Interface TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 E1 (1-16) Description Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical interface Receive port of the first STM-1 optical interface Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical interface Receive port of the second STM-1 optical interface The first to sixteenth E1 signals Anea 96 LC (the SFP optical module) Connector Type LC (the SFP optical module)
The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96 interface is provided in Figure 3-9 and Table 3-12. Figure 3-9 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface
POS.1
POS.96
3-20
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-21
3 Boards
Pin 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
Signal The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
Pin 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Signal The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card. The CF card stores the following information:
l l l l
All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data NE software and all the board software programs All the FPGA files License file for microwave link capability
3-22
3 Boards
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Table 3-13 Setting the DIP switches Setting the DIP Switchesa 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 Normal operating state when the watchdog is enabled. Reserved. Memory selfcheck state. Commissioning state. Operating state when the watchdog is disabled and the full memory check is performed.
3-23
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
Function
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Setting the DIP Switchesa 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 3 0 1 1 4 1 0 1
Function
BIOS holdover state. BIOS exhibition state. Reserved (by default, operating state when the watchdog is started). Reserved (by default, operating state when the watchdog is started). To recover the data of the CF card. To erase the data in the system parameter area. To erase the databases. To erase the NE software, including the patches. To erase the databases and NE software (including the patches). To format the file system, that is, to erase all the data in the file system.
1 1
0 1
1 0
1 0
3-24
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Setting the DIP Switchesa 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1
Function
To format the file system so that all the data is erased (file system + extended BIOS + system parameter area).
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is turned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary slots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional unit on the CSTA. Figure 3-11 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSTA) Slot 4 (EXT)
According to the functional units, the CSTA is mapped into the logical system control and communication board (CSTA), logical auxiliary and management board (AUX), and logical service boards (SL1D and SP3S) on the NMS. Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSTA) Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)
3.3.7 Board Feature Code

The E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-25
3 Boards
Table 3-14 Board feature code of the CSTA Board Feature Code A B Interface Impedance (Ohm) 120 75
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.
Related References
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
3.3.9 Technical Specifications

This topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDH optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Cross-Connection Performance
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-15 STM-1 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Performance 155520 Ie-1 Multi-mode fiber S-1.1 Single-mode fiber L-1.1 Single-mode fiber L-1.2 Single-mode fiber
3-26
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Item Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Performance 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-16 E1 interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance 2048 HDB3 One coaxial wire pair 75 One symmetrical wire pair 120
Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-17 Orderwire interface performance Item Transmission path Orderwire type Wire pair in each transmission direction
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Performance Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. Addressing call One symmetrical wire pair
3-27
3 Boards
Item Impedance (ohm)
Performance 600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-18 Synchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface type Interface characteristics Performance Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 64 Codirectional Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-19 Asynchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface characteristics Performance Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 19.2 Meets the RS-232 standard.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the ITU-T Recommendations.
3-28
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Table 3-20 Clock timing and synchronization performance Item External synchronization source Frequency accuracy Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance Performance 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 13) Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-21 Wayside service interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the microwave frame. 2048 120
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-22 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions Weight Performance 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm (width) 1.08 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 13.6W
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-29
3 Boards
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication, switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are with regard to the types and number of service interfaces. 3.4.1 Version Description The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1. 3.4.2 Functions and Features The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division crossconnection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE interfaces, PDH/SDH interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces. 3.4.3 Working Principle The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit. 3.4.4 Front Panel There are indicators, service interfaces, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons, and labels on the front panel. 3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card. 3.4.6 Valid Slots The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. 3.4.7 Board Feature Code The E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name. 3.4.8 Board Parameter Settings This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. 3.4.9 Technical Specifications This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, crossconnection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division crossconnection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the
3 Boards
CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE interfaces, PDH/SDH interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.
Packet Switching
l l
Supports the E-Line and E-LAN services. Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/p-compliant VLAN tags and forwards packets based on the VLAN tags. Supports the MAC address learning function. Supports the MSTP protocol that adopts only the common and internal spanning tree (CIST). Supports the IGMP Snooping protocol. Supports the QoS function. Supports the ITU-T G.8032-compliant ERPS Ethernet ring protection. Supports the disabling of the Ethernet interface connecting to the user equipment when a fault occurs on the transmission network. Supports two aggregation modes (namely, manual aggregation and static aggregation) and two load sharing types (namely, sharing and non-sharing). The load sharing algorithm is based on the hash algorithm of the MAC address or the IP address. Supports the Ethernet OAM functions that are compliant with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. Supports the synchronous Ethernet that is compliant with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G. 8262.
l l
l l l l
Time Division Cross-Connection

l l
Grooms service signals between boards. Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
System Control and Communication

l
Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and the ODUs by using the NE software. Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control and communication unit. Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards. Realizes the communication with the NMS and other NEs. The CSHC can process a maximum of seven DCCs. The CSHA and CSHB can provide up to 5 DCC channels. Cross-connects and processes overheads.
l l
Clock Processing
l
Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals for the other boards. Supports one input and one output of the external clock.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-31
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
l
Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the system clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, microwave interface line clock, Ethernet interface line clock, or tributary clock. Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message (SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol. Supports the detection of the state of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop. Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes.
l l
TDM Service Processing Interfaces

l l l
The CSHA provides sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces. The CSHB provides thirty-two 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces. The CSHC supports sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces and two STM-1 optical interfaces. The two STM-1 optical interfaces use the SFP optical modules.
Ethernet Service Interfaces

l
The CSHA provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE electrical interfaces. The two GE electrical interfaces can also transmit FE electrical signals. The CSHB provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE electrical interfaces. The two GE electrical interfaces can also transmit FE electrical signals. The CSHC provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE optical interfaces. The two GE optical interfaces use the SFP optical modules. The Ethernet interfaces support the auto-negotiation and self-loop diagnosis functions. Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The following three TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. The tag attributes of an Ethernet interface can be set only when the network attributes of the Ethernet interface is set to UNI. Supports the IEEE 802.3x-compliant flow control function.
l l

l l l l l l l
Provides one Ethernet NM interface. Provides one NM serial interface. Provides one NE cascade interface. Provides one Orderwire interface. Provides one asynchronous data interface. Provides one synchronous data interface. Provides one three-input and one-output external alarm interface.
l l l l
Performs the 1+1 protection switching. Performs the linear MSP switching. Performs the SNCP switching. Performs the clock protection switching.
3-32
3 Boards

l l
Reports various alarms and performance events. Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm thresholds. Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events. Supports RMON performance events.
NOTE
For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
l l l l l l
Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet interfaces. Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet interfaces. Supports the inloop and outloop over optical interfaces. Supports the outloop on VC-4 paths. Supports the board reset. Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the -48 V power supply. Checks the indicators on all the boards. Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions. Supports the query of the board manufacturing information. Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading prevention function. Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and backs up the configuration data. The backup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an onsite board replacement.
l l l l

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
NOTE
This topic considers the CSHC as an example to describe the working principle of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-33
3 Boards

Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram
Backplane
FE signal
FE signal access unit GE signal access unit

STM-1 signal processing unit E1 signal processing unit
FE signal Packet switching unit GE bus

Ethernet service board
GE signal
GE signal
VC-4 signal VC-4 signal
Cross-connect unit
VC-4 signal
TDM service board
E1 signal
Control bus
NM interface
NM serial interface
NE cascade interface
Asynchronous data interface Synchronous data interface
System control and communication unit
Clock unit
Clock signal received from other boards Clock signal provided to the other boards
Auxiliary interface unit
External alarm interface Orderwire interface Clock interface
Clock signal received from the service unit on the board
External clock signal Power supplied to the other units on the board Power supply unit -48 V1 -48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied to other boards +12 V power supplied to the fans
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l
Controls and manages the other units on the board, and also collects alarms and performance events through the control bus. Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance events through the control bus. Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM in the IF board.
3-34

l
3 Boards
The CPU unit drives the packet switching unit to groom Ethernet service packets, through the control bus. The CPU unit processes the Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit, through the control bus. Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit. The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE cascade interface. The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the software. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads the FPGA software. The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:

l l
Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit. Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services. Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines.
Packet Switching Unit

The main functional unit of the packet switching unit is the Layer 2 switching unit. The Layer 2 switching unit performs the operations related to the Layer 2 switching and Layer 2 protocol.
l
After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from other Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit. After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from other Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing. The system control and communication unit processes the protocol packets and then sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit on the board or to the other Ethernet boards.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order crossconnect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-14 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-35
3 Boards
Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit

Source TDM service unit HOXC Sink TDM service unit
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order crossconnect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
FE Signal Access Unit

The FE signal access unit provides access to two FE signals and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.
l
In the receive direction, after performing restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the FE signals, the FE signal access unit extracts framed FE signals by delimiting the frames and adding the preambles and performs the CRC check and Ethernet performance statistics. In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating the CRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the FE signal access unit performs the parallel/serial conversion, encodes the FE signals, and then transmits the FE signals to the FE interface.
GE Signal Access Unit

The GE signal access unit provides access to two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signals and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.
l
In the receive direction, after performing the O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the GE optical signals or after performing restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the GE electrical signals, the GE signal access unit extracts framed GE signals by delimiting the frames and adding the preambles and performs the CRC check and Ethernet performance statistics.
3-36

l
3 Boards
In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating the CRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the GE signal access unit performs the parallel/serial conversion and encoding and then transmits the GE signals to the GE interface after performing O/E conversion.
E1 Signal Processing Unit

The E1 signal processing unit provides access to, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical signals, and also processes overheads. The signal processing flow on this unit is the same as the signal processing flow on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
STM-1 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1 signal processing unit provides access to STM-1 optical signals, extracts the clock signal, restores the data, scrambles/descrambles the data, processes overheads, and processes pointers. The signal processing flow on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as the signal processing flow on the SL1D. For details, see 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow of the SL1D.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a service interface according to the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals to other units on the system control and communication board and the other boards.
Auxiliary Interface Unit

The auxiliary interface unit processes the input and output of the Orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions: l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board. l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required by the other boards in the IDU. l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by the fan.
3.4.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, service interfaces, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-15 Front panel of the CSHA
CSHA
PROG SYNC STAT SRV
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2
E1 1~16
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-37
3 Boards
1. Indicators 4. FE service interfaces
2. Buttons 5. GE service interfaces
3. Auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces 6. E1 (1-16) interface
Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHB

CSHB
PROG STAT SYNC SRV
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2
E1 1~16
E1 17~32
1. Indicators 4. FE service interfaces
3. Auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces 6. E1 (1-32) interface
Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHC

CSHC
1 2 1 2
STAT PROG SYNC SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2 LOS1 LOS2
GE1 GE2 STM-1
E1 E1(1~16) 1~16 STM-1 STM-1
CF RCV RCV RSTNMS/COM CF RST NMS/COM
EXT NE
CLK/TIME CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
ETH GE
1. Indicators 4. FE service interfaces 7. E1 (1-16) interface
3. Auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces 6. STM-1 optical interfaces
Indicators
Table 3-23 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
3-38
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning
l l l
PROG
Off SYNC On (green) On (red) SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off
The software is running normally. The clock is normal. The clock source is lost or is switched. The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs on the board. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system.
Table 3-24 Description of the indicators on the CSHC Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-39
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning
l l l
PROG
Off SYNC On (green) On (red) SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LINK1 On (green) Off ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) Off LINK2 On (green) Off
The software is running normally. The clock is normal. The clock source is lost or is switched. The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs on the board. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. The port connection is normal. The port connection is interrupted. The data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. The port connection is normal. The port connection is interrupted.
3-40
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Indicator ACT2
State On or blinking (yellow) Off
Meaning The data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. The first optical interface on the line reports the R_LOS alarm. The first optical interface on the line does not report the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface on the line reports the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface on the line does not report the R_LOS alarm.
LOS1
On (red) Off
LOS2
On (red) Off
Description of the Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces

Table 3-25 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces Interface NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE CF RCV RST Description NM interface/NM serial interface NE cascade interface External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface Alarm input/output interface Orderwire interface CF configuration reset button Board warm reset button Connector Type
RJ-45
NOTE
The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface can transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data service overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clock interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte. The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent transmission of the orderwire byte.
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-18 shows the front view of the RJ-45 connector.
3 Boards
Figure 3-18 Front view of the RJ-45 connector
87654321
Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface Interface Pin 1 2 3 4 NMS/COM 5 6 7 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Grounding end of the NM serial interface Receive end of the NM serial interface Receiving data (-) Not defined Transmit end of the NM serial interface
Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the EXT interface Interface Pin 1 2 EXT 3 6 4, 5, 7, 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Not defined
NOTE
The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see Table 3-28.
3 Boards
Table 3-28 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The interface is transmitting or receiving data. The interface is not transmitting or receiving data.
NOTE
The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise, an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed on the NEs.
Figure 3-19 shows the two common incorrect connections. Figure 3-19 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface
CSHA
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2
E1 1~16
LAN
CSHA
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2
E1 1~16
The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is provided in Table 3-29.
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-43
3 Boards
Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface Pin Working Mode Externa l Clock External Time Input (1 PPS + Time Informatio n) 1 CLK receivin g (-) CLK receivin g (+) Not defined Not defined External Time Output (1 PPS + Time Information) External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
1 PPS signal input (-) (RS-422 level)
1 PPS signal output (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end
DCLS time signal input (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end
DCLS time signal output (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end
CLK transmit ting (-) CLK transmit ting (+) Not defined
Grounding end Grounding end 1 PPS signal input (+) (RS-422 level)
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
1 PPS signal output (+) (RS-422 level) Time information output (-) (RS-422 level) Time information output (+) (RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal input (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined
DCLS time signal output (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined
Not defined
Time information input (-) (RS-422 level)
Not defined
Time information input (+) (RS-422 level)
Not defined
Not defined
The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-30.
3-44
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Table 3-30 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface Interface F1/S1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Transmitting asynchronous data signals Grounding end Receiving asynchronous data signals Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP) Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING) Grounding end Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP) Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-31. Table 3-31 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface Interface ALMI/ ALMO Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal The first external alarm input signal Grounding end for the first alarm input signal The second external alarm input signal The third external alarm input signal Grounding end for the third alarm input signal Grounding end for the second alarm input signal The first external alarm output signal (+) The first external alarm output signal (-)
The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-32. Table 3-32 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface Interface PHONE Pin 1 2 3 4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Signal Not defined
RING
3-45
3 Boards
Interface
Pin 5 6 7 8
Signal TIP Not defined
Service Interfaces
Table 3-33 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB Interface FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2 E1 (1-16) E1 (17-32) The first to sixteenth E1 signal interfaces The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 signal interfaces a Anea 96 GE electrical interface Description FE interface RJ-45 Connector Type
NOTE
a. Only the CSHB provides 32 E1 signal interfaces. The CSHA provides only 16 E1 signal interfaces.
Table 3-34 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC Interface FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2 TX1 RX1 TX2 Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical interface Receive port of the first STM-1 optical interface Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical interface
Description FE interface
Connector Type RJ-45
GE optical interface
LC (the SFP optical module)
3-46
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Interface RX2 E1 (1-16)
Description Receive port of the second STM-1 optical interface The first to sixteenth E1 signals
Connector Type
Anea 96
The FE interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-negotiation modes. For the pin assignment information, see Table 3-35 and Table 3-36. Table 3-35 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 RX+ RXFunction Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-47
3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)
3 4 5 6 7 8
TX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. The meanings of the two indicators are the same as the meanings of the indicators on the NMS/COM interface (RJ-45 connector). The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96 interface is provided in Figure 3-20 and Table 3-37. Figure 3-20 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface
POS.1
POS.96
Table 3-37 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface Pin 1 2 3 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) Pin 25 26 27 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-48
3 Boards
Pin 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Signal The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-)
Pin 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Signal The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-49
3 Boards
Pin 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
Signal The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
Pin 47 48 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Signal The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card. The CF card stores the following information:
l l l l
All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data NE software and all the board software programs All the FPGA files License file for microwave link capability
3-50
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Figure 3-21 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Table 3-38 Setting the DIP switches Setting the DIP Switchesa 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 Normal operating state when the watchdog is enabled. Reserved. Memory selfcheck state. Commissioning state. Operating state when the watchdog is disabled and the full memory check is performed.
3-51
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
Function
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Setting the DIP Switchesa 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 3 0 1 1 4 1 0 1
Function
BIOS holdover state. BIOS exhibition state. Reserved (by default, operating state when the watchdog is started). Reserved (by default, operating state when the watchdog is started). To recover the data of the CF card. To erase the data in the system parameter area. To erase the databases. To erase the NE software, including the patches. To erase the databases and NE software (including the patches). To format the file system, that is, to erase all the data in the file system.
1 1
0 1
1 0
1 0
3-52
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Setting the DIP Switchesa 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1
Function
To format the file system so that all the data is erased (file system + extended BIOS + system parameter area).
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is turned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.
3.4.6 Valid Slots

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. Figure 3-22 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)
Different logical boards are allocated for the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC on the NMS. Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 ( CSHA ) Slot 10 ( AUX ) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3S)
Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSHB ) Slot 10 ( AUX ) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3D)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-53
3 Boards
Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC
Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 1 ( CSHC ) Slot 10 ( AUX ) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 7 (EM4F) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

The E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name. Table 3-39 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC Board Feature Code A B Interface Impedance (Ohm) 120 75

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
Related References
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface

This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, crossconnection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching
Supports the 4.2Gbit/s packet switching function.
3-54
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Cross-Connection Performance
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
Ethernet Interface Performance

The Ethernet interface performance meets the relevant standards specified in IEEE 802.3. The following three tables provide the performance indexes of the GE optical interfaces, GE electrical interfaces, and FE electrical interfaces, respectively. Table 3-40 Performance of the GE optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 1000 1000Base-SX Multiple-mode optical fiber 0.5 770 to 860 -9.5 to 0 -17 0 9 1000Base-LX Single-mode optical fiber 10 1270 to 1355 -9 to -3 -19 -3 9
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Table 3-41 GE electric interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ-45
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-55
3 Boards
Table 3-42 FE electric interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ-45

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-43 STM-1 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 155520 Ie-1 Multi-mode fiber 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10 S-1.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10
NOTE
3-56
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-45 Orderwire interface performance Item Transmission path Orderwire type Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. Addressing call One symmetrical wire pair 600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-46 Synchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface type Interface characteristics Performance Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 64 Codirectional Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-57
3 Boards
Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-47 Asynchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface characteristics Performance Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 19.2 Meets the RS-232 standard.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the ITU-T Recommendations. Table 3-48 Clock timing and synchronization performance Item External synchronization source Frequency accuracy Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance Performance 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 13) Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-49 Wayside service interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the microwave frame. 2048 120
3-58
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-50 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions Weight Performance 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm (width) CSHA: 1.11 kg CSHB: 1.16 kg CSHC: 1.13 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the CSHA: < 18.0 W Power consumption of the CSHB: < 22.7 W Power consumption of the CSHC: < 19.6 W
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A and IF1B. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B. The only difference from the IF1B is that the IF1A is more reliable. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distribution modes. 3.5.1 Version Description The functional version of the IF1 is SL91. 3.5.2 Functions and Features The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODU and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF1. 3.5.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel. 3.5.5 Valid Slots The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. 3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1. 3.5.7 Technical Specifications This topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3 Boards

The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODU and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
IF Processing
l l l l l
Maps SDH and PDH service signals into microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals. Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.
Overhead Processing
l l l l l
Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave frame signals. Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 overhead bytes in the SDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and query of the link ID.
NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination mode. In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default, the board adopts the passthrough mode.
Pointer Processing
l l
Processes the AU pointers in the SDH microwave signals. Processes the TU pointers in the PDH microwave signals.
l l l
Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, 1+1 SD, and SNCP, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3-60
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards

l l
NOTE
l l l l l l l
Supports the inloop and outloop over IF interfaces. Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports. Supports the detection of the board temperature. Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock. Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board. Supports the query of the board manufacturing information. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
l l
For details on the loopback function, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit but does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), and a service interruption.
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF1.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-61
3 Boards

Figure 3-26 Functional block diagram of the IF1
Backplane ODU control signal HSM switching signal System control and communication unit Paired board
SMODEM unit
Logic processing unit
Service bus Overhead bus
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing unit
IF
Microwave MODEM unit frame signal
Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit
Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1 Step 1 2 Functional Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Separates the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal.
l l
Combiner interface unit
Control bus
System control and communication unit Logic control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to other modules on the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
-48 V +3.3 V
Clock unit
+3.3 power supplied to the monitoring circuit
System clock signal
Demodulates the ODU control signal. Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial interface of the CPU unit in the system control and communication unit. Controls the level of the service signal through the automatic gain control (AGC) circuit. Filters the signal. Performs A/D conversion.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
IF processing unit
l l
3-62
3 Boards
Step 4
Functional Unit MODEM unit
Processing Flow
l l l
Performs digital demodulation. Performs time domain adaptive equalization. Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms. Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. Performs descrambling. Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Checks the link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit through the control bus. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit. Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit. Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. Checks the higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal to the logic processing unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)
l l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-63
3 Boards
Step
Functional Unit MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing)
Processing Flow
l
Detects the PDH microwave frame header and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Verifies the check code and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit through the control bus. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes from the PDH microwave frame to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit. Adjusts the TU pointers. Maps the TU-12s of the PDH microwave signals into the specified position in the VC-4. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system control and communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead bandwidth. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the cross-connect unit.
l l
l l
NOTE
In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits the service signals by HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board selects the signal of higher quality for subsequent processing.
3-64
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-52 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1 Step 1 Functional Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l
Processes the clock signal. Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2 Mbit/s overhead signals. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the cross-connect unit. Sets the higher order path overheads. Sets the AU pointer. Sets the multiplex section overheads. Sets the regenerator section overheads. Performs scrambling. Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal. Sets the PDH microwave frame overheads. Performs FEC coding. Performs digital modulation. Performs D/A conversion. Performs analog modulation.
MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)
l l l l l
MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing) 3 MODEM unit
l l
l l
IF processing unit
l l
5 6
SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit
Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service signal, and -48 V power supplies, and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the board through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply unit

l
Receives the -48 V power supply from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs the start-relay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion operations, and then supplies the -48 V power to the ODU.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
l
Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock signal to the other units on the board.
3.5.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1
ODU-PWR
IF1
-48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
I
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-53 Description of the indicators on the IF1 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
SRV
On (green) On (red)
The services are normal. Indicates that a critical or major alarm occurs in the service. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The space link is normal. The space link is faulty.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
On (yellow) Off LINK On (green) On (red)

3-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
IF
WARNING
IF1
3 Boards
Indicator ODU
State On (green) On (red)
Meaning The ODU works normally.

l
The logical board is not added on the NMS The ODU has critical or major alarms. No power is supplied.
On (yellow) On for 300 ms (yellow) and off for 300 ms repeatedly RMT On (yellow) Off
The ODU has minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The equipment at the opposite end reports an RDI. The equipment at the opposite end does not report an RDI.
l
ACT
On (green)
The board is in the active state in the 1+1 protection system. The board is already activated in the unprotected system. The board is in the standby state in the 1+1 protection system. The board is not activated in the unprotected system.
Off
Interfaces
Table 3-54 Description of the Interfaces Interface IF ODU-PWRa Description IF interface ODU power switch Connector Type TNC Corresponding Cable IF jumperb -
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-67
3 Boards
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever outwards slightly. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch before removing the IF cable. The operation guidance label indicates that you need to pull the switch outward slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
3.5.5 Valid Slots

The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-28 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 1 Slot 4 (IF1)
The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-29 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1
Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 10 Slot 1 SLOT 7 Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (IF1) Slot 8 Slot 9
3-68
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Table 3-55 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 3 > slot 4

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
IF Performance
Table 3-56 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ASK 5.5 10 350 140 50 Performance
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-69
3 Boards
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-57 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Performance
l l
Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for SDH microwave signals
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and Packet microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.
NOTE
In this version, the IFU2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.
3.6.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91. 3.6.2 Functions and Features The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2. 3.6.4 Front Panel
3 Boards
There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel. 3.6.5 Valid Slots The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. 3.6.6 Parameter Settings This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2. 3.6.7 Technical Specifications This topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
IF Processing
l
Supports the Hybrid microwave frames, and supports the pure transmission of E1 or Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals. Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission. Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology. Maps service signals into microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals. Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies. Provides a maximum of 56 MHz signal bandwidth and supports the highest modulation mode of 256QAM.
l l l l l l l l
Overhead Processing
l l
Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals. Supports the setting and query of the link ID.
l l l
Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching. Supports N+1 protection.
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-71
3 Boards

l l
NOTE
l l l l l l l l l l l
Supports the inloop and outloop over IF interfaces. Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports. Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports. Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces. Supports the detection of the board temperature. Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock. Supports the detection of the board voltage. Supports the detection of the board clock. Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board. Supports the query of the board manufacturing information. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
l l

This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
NOTE
The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/ demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.
3-72
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards

Figure 3-30 Functional block diagram of the IFU2
SMODEM unit ODU control signal Backplane System control and communication unit HSM switching signal Service bus
Overhead bus
Paired board
Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit
Logic processi ng unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing unit
IF
MODEM Microwave frame unit signal
Ethernet processin g unit
GE bus
Packet switching unit
Control bus
System control and communication unit Logic control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board +3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
-48 V1 -48V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2 Step 1 2 Functional Module Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Separates the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal.
l l
Demodulates the ODU control signal. Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control and communication unit. Filters the signal. Performs the ADC sampling. Performs A/D conversion.
IF processing unit
l l l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-73
3 Boards
Step 4
Functional Module MODEM unit
Processing Flow
l l l
Performs digital demodulation. Performs time domain adaptive equalization. Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms. Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Verifies the check code and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Checks the link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit through the control bus. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit. Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit. Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid microwave service signals to the ethernet processing unit. Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. Sends the processed signals to the packet switching unit. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system control and communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead bandwidth. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the cross-connect unitthe main and standby cross-connect units.
MUX/DEMUX unit
Ethernet processing unit
l l
3-74
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

NOTE
3 Boards

Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2 Step 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l
Processes the clock signal. Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2 Mbit/s overhead signals. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the cross-connect unit. Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit. Processes the GE signals. Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal. Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads. Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. Performs FEC coding. Performs digital modulation. Performs D/A conversion. Performs analog modulation. Filters the signal. Amplifies the signals.
Ethernet processing unit MUX/DEMUX unit
l l l l l
MODEM unit
l l
IF processing unit
l l l l
7 8

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the board through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
3 Boards
The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

l
This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the ODU. This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2.
Clock Unit
3.6.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-31 Front panel of the IFU2
IFU2
ODU-PWR
I
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-61 Description of the indicators on the IFU2 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
SRV
On (green) On (red)
The services are normal. Indicates that a critical or major alarm occurs in the service.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-76
STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
IF
WARNING
3 Boards
Indicator
State On (yellow) Off
Meaning A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The space link is normal. The space link is faulty. The ODU works normally.
l
LINK
On (green) On (red)
ODU
On (green) On (red)
l
ACT
On (green)
Off
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-77
3 Boards
Interface and Switch

Table 3-62 Description of the Interfaces Interface IF ODU-PWRa Description IF interface ODU power switch Connector Type TNC Corresponding Cable IF jumperb -
NOTE
Labels
3.6.5 Valid Slots

The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-32 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 1 Slot 4 (IFU2)
The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20.
3-78
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU) Slot 4 (IFU2) Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9
Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 10 Slot 1
3.6.6 Parameter Settings

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Related References
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
IF Performance
Table 3-64 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Performance
350
3-79
3 Boards
Item Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
Performance 140 50
ASK 5.5 10

Table 3-65 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Performance The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals. Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Power Consumption
Power consumption : < 23 W
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave and Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.

NOTE
3 Boards
In this version, the IFX2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.
3.7.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91. 3.7.2 Functions and Features The IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the crosspolarization interference in the IF signal. 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2. 3.7.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.7.5 Valid Slot The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. 3.7.6 Parameter Settings This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2. 3.7.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

The IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the crosspolarization interference in the IF signal.
IF Processing
l
Supports the XPIC function, provides the XPIC input and output interfaces, and supports the manual configuration of the XPIC function. Supports the Hybrid microwave frames and supports the pure transmission of E1 or Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals. Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission. Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology. Maps service signals into microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.
l l l l l l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
l l
Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies. Provides the maximum signal bandwidth of 56 MHz and supports the highest modulation mode of 256QAM.
Overhead Processing
l l
Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals. Supports the setting and query of the link ID.
l l l
Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching. Supports N+1 protection.
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

l l
NOTE
l l l l l l l l l l
Supports the inloop and outloop over IF interfaces. Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports. Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports. Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces. Supports the detection of the board temperature. Supports the detection of the board voltage. Supports the detection of the board clock. Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board. Supports the query of the board manufacturing information. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
3-82
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

NOTE
3 Boards
l l

This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
NOTE
The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/ demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.

Figure 3-34 Functional block diagram of the IFX2
Backplane SMODEM unit ODU control signal HSM switching signal Service bus
Overhead
System control and communication unit Paired board Cross - connect unit System control and communication unit Packet switching unit
Logic processi ng unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
bus
IF processing unit

XPIC signal
IF
Microwave frame signal
MODEM unit
GE bus
Control bus Logic control unit - 48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3V power supplied to the other units on the board +3.3V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board Clock unit
Power supply unit
- 48 V1 - 48 V2 +3.3 V
System clock signal
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-83
3 Boards

Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2 Step 1 2 Functional Module Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Separates the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal.
l l
Demodulates the ODU control signal. Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control and communication unit. Performs the ADC sampling. Filters the signal and splits the signal to two channels.
IF processing unit
l l
Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal and transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit. Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.
Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from the paired IFX2 and transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit. Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IF signal from the paired IFX2 as a reference signal. Performs time domain adaptive equalization. Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms.
MODEM unit
l l
3-84
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Step 5
Functional Module MUX/DEMUX unit
Processing Flow
l
Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Verifies the check code and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Checks the link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit through the control bus. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit. Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit. Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid microwave service signals to the Ethernet processing unit. Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. Sends the processed signals to the packet switching unit. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system control and communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead bandwidth. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the cross-connect unit.
l l
NOTE
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-85
3 Boards

Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2 Step 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l
Processes the clock signal. Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2 Mbit/s overhead signals. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the cross-connect unit. Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit. Processes the GE signals. Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal. Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads. Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. Performs FEC coding. Performs digital modulation. Performs D/A conversion. Performs analog modulation. Filters the signal. Amplifies the signals.
Ethernet processing unit MUX/DEMUX unit
l l l l l
MODEM unit
l l
IF processing unit
l l l l
7 8

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the board through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
3-86
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Power Supply Unit

l
This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the ODU. This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2.
Clock Unit
3.7.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-35 Front panel of the IFX2
IFX2
PULL
I
X-IN X-OUT
Indicators
Table 3-69 Description of the indicators on the IFX2 Indicator XPIC State On (green) On (red) Off STAT On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
3-87
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
XPIC STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
IF
WARNING
IFX2
ODU-PWR
3 Boards
Indicator SRV
State On (green) On (red)
Meaning The services are normal. Indicates that a critical or major alarm occurs in the service. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The space link is normal. The space link is faulty. The ODU works normally.
l
On (yellow) Off LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red)
l
ACT
On (green)
Off
3-88
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Interfaces
Table 3-70 Description of the interfaces Interface IF ODU-PWRa X-IN X-OUT Description IF interface ODU power switch XPIC signal input interface XPIC signal output interface Connector Type TNC SMA SMA Corresponding Cable IF jumperb XPIC cable
NOTE
Labels
3.7.5 Valid Slot

The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-36 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 1 Slot 4 (IFX2)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-89
3 Boards
The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 24 (ODU) Slot 4 (IFX2) Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9
Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 10 Slot 1

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
Related References
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

This section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
IF Performance
Table 3-72 IF performance Item IF signal
Performance
3 Boards
Item Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
Performance 350 140 50
ASK 5.5 10

Table 3-73 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Performance The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals. Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 33 W
3.8 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces and two GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as
3 Boards
follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces. 3.8.1 Version Description The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91. 3.8.2 Functions and Features The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals. 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F. 3.8.4 Front Panel There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F. The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules. 3.8.5 Valid Slots The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. 3.8.6 Board Feature Code The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. 3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F. 3.8.8 Technical Specifications This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.

The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.
Ethernet Service Signal Processing

l
The EM6T provides two GE electrical interfaces whereas the EM6F uses the SFP optical modules to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces. Supports the setting and query of the working modes of the Ethernet interfaces. The supported working modes are as follows:
The FE interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100M half duplex, and auto-negotiation. The GE electrical interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100M half duplex, 1000M full duplex, and auto-negotiation.
3-92

l
3 Boards
The GE optical interfaces support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/802.1p-compliant VLAN tags, and forwards packets based on the VLAN tags. Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The following three TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with the maximum frame length ranging from 1518 to 9600 bytes. Supports Jumbo frames with the maximum frame length of 9600 bytes. Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supports the link state pass through (LPT) function. Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function. Supports the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).
NOTE
l l l l l
For details on LAG and Link State Pass Through, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Services

The Ethernet interface board can realize the following functions when working with the packet switching board:
l l
Supports port-based, port+VLAN-based, and port+QinQ E-Line services. Supports 802.1d bridge-based, 802.1q bridge-based, and 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services.
QoS Service Processing

The Ethernet interface board can realize the following QoS functions when working with the packet switching board:
l
Supports flow classification over Ethernet interfaces based on the port, C-VLAN ID, SVLAN ID, priority of the 802.1p packets with C-VLAN or S-VLAN tags, or DSCP in the IPv6 packets. Supports CAR flow monitoring. Supports queue scheduling.

l l
Each Ethernet interface supports scheduling of eight levels of priority queues. Supports the setting of the queue scheduling mode of each Ethernet interface to SP, SP +WRR, or WRR.
Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, priority queue, or traffic flow.
Ethernet OAM Processing

The Ethernet interface board can realize the following Ethernet OAM functions when working with the packet switching board:
l
Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:

Management of OAM maintenance points Continuity check test

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
l
Loopback test Link trace test OAM automatic discovery Link performance monitoring Fault detection Loopback at the remote end Self-loop detection and self-loop port blocking
Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:

Clock Processing
l l
Supports synchronous Ethernet. Supports receiving and transmitting SSM messages through Ethernet interfaces.

l l
Reports various alarms and performance events. Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm thresholds. Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events. Supports RMON performance events.
NOTE
For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
l l l l l l l
Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet ports. Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet ports. Supports the mirroring function over Ethernet interfaces. Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board. Supports the detection of the board temperature. Supports the query of the board manufacturing information. Supports the query of the manufacturing information about the SFP module.

This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3-94
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards

Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram
Backplane GE signal GE signal Control signal access unit Ethernet processing unit Ethernet signal Ethernet signal Packet switching unit
FE signal Control signal access unit FE signal Control bus of the board
Logic control unit
Control bus
+3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock

Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction Step 1 Functional Unit GE signal access unit Processing Flow
l l
Provides access to GE signal. Performs reassembling, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the GE signals. Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code processing, and Ethernet performance count for the frame signals.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-95
3 Boards
Step 2
Functional Unit Ethernet processing unit
Processing Flow
l
Adds the tags identifying the ingress ports to the Ethernet data frames. Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames. Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic classification and CAR traffic monitoring, for the Ethernet data frames. Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the logic processing unit.
l l
Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the packet switching unit.

Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction Step 1 Functional Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l
Selects the Ethernet data frames from the packet switching unit. Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet processing unit. Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames. Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling, for the Ethernet data frames. Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the corresponding egress ports based on the egress tags contained in the Ethernet data frames. Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance count. Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for the Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE/ GE signals through the Ethernet interfaces.
l l
GE signal access unit

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access by using the control signal. The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit through the control unit on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit through the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control
3 Boards
unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit

This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.8.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F. The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-39 Front panel of the EM6T
EM6T
STAT PROG SRV
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Figure 3-40 Front panel of the EM6F

EM6F
STAT PROG SRV LINK1 LINK2
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Indicators
Table 3-77 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.

3-97
EM6F
EM6T
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning
l l l
SRV
The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the software is being loaded to the flash memory. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board software is in BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading the upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic file or upper layer software is lost. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
PROG
Off LINK1a On (green) Blinking (yellow) Off LINK2a On (green) Flashing (green) Off
The software is running normally. The GE1 interface is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 interface is receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 interface is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE2 interface is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 interface is receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 interface is not connected or is connected incorrectly.
3-98
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

NOTE
3 Boards
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the corresponding GE optical interfaces.
Interfaces
Table 3-78 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F Inte rfac e FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 GE1 GE2 GE1 GE2 GE electrical interface GE optical interface (EM6F) LC (SFP optical module) 5.5 Fiber Jumper RJ-45 5.8 Network Cable Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
FE interface
The FE electrical interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI and MDI-X adaptation modes. For the front view and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-41 and refer to Table 3-79 and Table 3-80. Figure 3-41 Front view of the RJ-45 connector
87654321
Table 3-79 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 TX+ Function Transmitting data (+) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ Function Bidirectional data wire A (+)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-99
3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved
Table 3-80 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)
3-100
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For meaning of the indicators, see Table 3-81. Table 3-81 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The interface is transmitting or receiving data. The interface is not transmitting or receiving data.
Label
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.8.5 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-42 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 1 Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Figure 3-43 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot10 Slot 1 Slot 7 Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 8 Slot 9
Table 3-82 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 4 > slot 3
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-101
3 Boards

The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. Table 3-83 Board feature code of the EM6F Board Feature Code 01 02 03 Module Type 1000BASE-SX (Multimode, 0.5 km) 1000BASE-LX (Singlemode, 10 km) 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) (100m) BOM Code of the Module 34060286 34060473 34100052

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
Related References
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
Performance of Optical Interfaces

The optical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the optical interfaces. Table 3-84 Performance of the GE optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km)
3-102
Performance 1000 1000Base-SX Multiple-mode optical fiber 0.5 1000Base-LX Single-mode optical fiber 10
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Item Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Performance 770 to 860 -9.5 to 0 -17 0 9 1270 to 1355 -9 to -3 -19 -3 9
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Interfaces

The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical interfaces. Table 3-85 GE electric interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ-45
Performance of FE Electrical Interfaces

The FE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical interfaces. Table 3-86 FE electric interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
3 Boards
Item Interface type
Performance RJ-45
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-87 Mechanical behavior Item Performance EM6T Dimensions Weight EM6F
19.82mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width) 0.37 kg 0.38 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of EM6T: < 10.4 W Power consumption of EM6F: < 11.3 W
3.9 SL1D
The SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board. 3.9.1 Version Description The functional version of the SL1D is SL91. 3.9.2 Functions and Features The SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals. 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D. 3.9.4 Front Panel There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel. 3.9.5 Valid Slots The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. 3.9.6 Board Feature Code The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name. 3.9.7 Parameter Settings This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D. 3.9.8 Technical Specifications
3 Boards
This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.

The SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
Specifications for Optical Interfaces

l l
Provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces. All the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.
Specifications for Optical Modules

l l l l
Adopts the SFP optical module to facilitate the later maintenance of the optical module. Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module. Supports the enabling and disabling of the laser. Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
NOTE
The ALS function is described as follows: 1. After detecting that the R_LOS alarm persists over the receive port for 500 ms, the optical module automatically shuts down the laser of the transmit port. 2. The laser changes to emit alternative laser pulses. The laser pulses are emitted for 2s after a 60s interval. 3. After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser is recovered to normal and emits light continuously.
Overhead Processing
l l l l
Processes the regenerator section overheads in STM-1 signals. Processes the multiplex section overheads in STM-1 signals. Processes the higher order path overheads in STM-1 signals. Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 byte.
NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination mode. In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default, the board adopts the pass-through mode.
Pointer Processing
Processes AU pointers.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-105
3 Boards
l
Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in a linear MSP group. Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions. Supports the setting of linear MSP switching conditions.
NOTE
l l
For details on SNCP and linear MSP, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

l l
NOTE
l l l l l
Supports the inloop and outloop over optical interfaces. Supports the outloop on VC-4 paths. Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board. Supports the query of the board manufacturing information. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit but does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), and service interruption.

This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3-106
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards

Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the SL1D
Service bus
Backplane Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit System control and communication unit
STM-1 STM-1
O/E conversion unit
Control bus Logic control unit
Overhead processing unit
Overhead bus
Supplies power to the other units on the board
+3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-88 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D Step 1 Functional Unit O/E conversion unit Processing Flow
l l l
Regenerates STM-1 optical signals. Detects the R_LOS alarm. Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-107
3 Boards
Step 2
Functional Unit Overhead processing unit
Processing Flow
l l
Restores the clock signal. Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. Performs descrambling. Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the system control and communication unit. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. Checks the higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal to the logic processing unit. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system control and communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead bandwidth. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the cross-connect unit.
l l
l l

Table 3-89 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D Step 1 Functional Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l
Processes the clock signal. Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2 Mbit/s overhead signals. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the cross-connect unit.
3-108
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Step 2
Functional Unit Overhead processing unit
Processing Flow
l l l l l
Sets the higher order path overheads. Sets the AU pointer. Sets the multiplex section overheads. Sets the regenerator section overheads. Performs scrambling. Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.
O/E conversion unit

The SL1D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the SL1D through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit and loads the FPGA software.
Clock Unit
3.9.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-45 Front panel of the SL1D
SL1D
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
Indicators
Table 3-90 Description of the indicators on the SL1D Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.

3-109
SL1D
3 Boards
Indicator
State Off
Meaning
l l l
SRV
On (green) On (red)
The services are normal. Indicates that a critical or major alarm occurs in the service. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The first optical interface of the SL1D reports the R_LOS alarm. The first optical interface of the SL1D does not report the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SL1D reports the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SL1D does not report the R_LOS alarm.
On (yellow) Off LOS1 On (red)
Off
LOS2
On (red)
Off
Interfaces
Table 3-91 Description of the interfaces Interface TX1 Description Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical interface Receive port of the first STM-1 optical interface Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical interface LC (SFP) Connector Type LC (SFP) Corresponding Cable Fiber jumper
RX1
TX2
3-110
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Interface RX2
Description Receive port of the second STM-1 optical interface
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.9.5 Valid Slots

The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-46 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 1 Slot 4 (SL1D)
Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 10 Slot 1 Slot 7 Slot 4 (SL1D) Slot 8 Slot 9
Table 3-92 Slot allocation for the SL1D Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 4 > slot 3

The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
3 Boards
Table 3-93 Board feature code of the SL1D Feature Code 01 02 03 04 Type of Optical Module Ie-1 (Multi-mode, 2km) S-1.1 (Single-mode, 15km) L-1.1 (Single-mode, 40km) L-1.2 (Single-mode, 80km) Part Number of the Optical Module 34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
Related References
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-94 STM-1 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm)
3-112
Performance 155520 Ie-1 Multi-mode fiber 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 S-1.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 L-1.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 L-1.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Item Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Performance -30 -14 10 -28 -8 8.2 -34 -10 10 -34 -10 10
NOTE
Mechanical Behavior
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 3.4 W
3.10 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. 3.10.1 Version Description The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1. 3.10.2 Functions and Features The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D. 3.10.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel. 3.10.5 Valid Slots The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots.
3 Boards
3.10.6 Board Feature Code The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name. 3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D. 3.10.8 Technical Specifications This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.

The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Overhead and Pointer Processing

l l l
Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level. Supports the query of the J2 and V5 bytes. Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 bytes.
Clock Processing
l l
Supports the E1 retiming function. Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.

l l
NOTE
l l l l
Supports the inloop and outloop over the E1 tributary interfaces. Supports the PRBS 15 test. Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board. Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
3-114
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

NOTE
3 Boards
l l

This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.

Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D
Backplane
Mapping/Demappi ng unit
E1
E1 signal
Service bus
Interface unit
Codec unit
Cross-connect unit
E1
Control bus
Logic control unit

+3.3V power supplied to the board +3.3V backup power supplied to the board
Power Supply Unit
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-96 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D Step 1 Functional Unit Interface unit Processing Flow The external E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then are transmitted to the board.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-115
3 Boards
Step 2
Functional Unit Codec unit
Processing Flow
l l l l
Equalizes the received signals. Recovers the clock signal. Detects the T_ALOS alarm. Performs the HDB3 decoding. Asynchronously maps the signals into C-12s. Adds the path overhead bytes to the C-12s, thus forming VC-12s. Processes the pointers, thus forming TU-12s. Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-12s, thus forming one TUG-2. Performs the byte interleaving for seven TU-2s, thus forming one TUG-3. Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-3s, thus forming one C-4. Adds the higher order path overhead bytes to the C-4, thus forming one VC-4. Processes the clock signal. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the cross-connect unit.
Mapping/ Demapping unit
l l
l l
l l

Table 3-97 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D Step 1 Functional Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l
Processes the clock signal. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the cross-connect unit. Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the corresponding alarms and performance events. Extracts the E1 signals.
Mapping/ Demapping unit
l l l l
3 4
Codec unit Interface unit
Performs the HDB3 coding. The E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then are transmitted to the external cable.
3-116
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards

The SP3S/SP3D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the SP3S/SP3D through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.10.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-49 Front panel of the SP3S
SP3S
STAT SRV
E1 1-16
Figure 3-50 Front panel of the SP3D

SP3D
STAT SRV
21 1 22
42
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
SP3D
SP3S
3-117
3 Boards
Indicator
Table 3-98 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
SRV
On (green) On (red)
The services are normal. Indicates that a critical or major alarm occurs in the service. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
On (yellow) Off
Interface
Table 3-99 Description of the interface on the SP3S Interface 1-22 Description The first to sixteenth E1 interfaces Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable E1 Cable to the External Equipment or E1 Cable to the E1 Panel
Table 3-100 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D Interface 1-22 Description The first to sixteenth E1 interfaces Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable E1 Cable to the External Equipment or E1 Cable to the E1 Panel
3-118
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Interface 23-42
Description The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 interfaces
Connector Type Anea 96
Corresponding Cable E1 Cable to the External Equipment or E1 Cable to the E1 Panel
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, only the ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D interface are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
The interfaces on the SP3S/SP3D use the Anea 96 connectors. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96 interfaces is provided in Figure 3-51 and Table 3-101. Figure 3-51 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface
POS.1
POS.96
Table 3-101 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-119
3 Boards
Pin 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50
Signal The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
Pin 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74
Signal The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3-120
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Pin 51 52 53 54 55 56
Signal The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
Pin 75 76 77 78 79 80
Signal The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3.10.5 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS should be the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-52 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 1 Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Figure 3-53 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 10 Slot 1 Slot 7 Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 8 Slot 9
Table 3-102 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 4 > slot 3
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-121
3 Boards

The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name. Table 3-103 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D Board Feature Code A B Interface Impedance (Ohm) 120 75

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related References
A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
3-122
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-105 Mechanical behavior Item Performance SP3S Dimensions Weight SP3D
19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width) 0.54 kg 0.64 kg
Power consumption
Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W
3.11 PIU
The PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies. 3.11.1 Version Description The functional version of the PIU is TNC1. 3.11.2 Functions and Features The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning protection, and information reporting. 3.11.3 Working Principle The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication unit, and board in-position unit. 3.11.4 Front Panel There are indicators and power access interfaces. 3.11.5 Valid Slots The PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the same as the physical slot. 3.11.6 Technical Specifications This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.

The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.

The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning protection, and information reporting.
3 Boards
l
Power access The PIU accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies for the equipment. The maximum power and maximum current of each power supply are 170 W and 5 A respectively.
Power protection The PIU protects the DC power supplies against overcurrent and short circuits. In this manner, the board and board components are prevented from being blown out in the case of overcurrent.
Lightning protection The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an alarm if the protection fails.
Power backup The two DC power supplies provide 1+1 hot backup for each other.

The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication unit, and board in-position unit. Figure 3-54 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU. Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the PIU
-48 V/-60 V Lightning protection Backplane and failure detection unit Alarm signal indicating lightning Lightning protection failure and failure detection unit Other boards
-48 V/-60 V
Other boards
Alarm signal indicating Inter-board lightning failure communication Communication bus unit Board inposition signal Board in-position unit
System control and communication unit System control and communication unit
Lightning Protection and Failure Detection Unit

This unit protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the lightning protective circuit. If the lightning protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to system control and communication unit, through the communication unit.
Communication Unit
This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and alarm signals indicating the lightning protection failure to the system control and communication unit.
Board In-Position Unit

This unit reports the board in-position signals to the system control and communication unit.
3 Boards
3.11.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and power access interfaces.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-55 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU. Figure 3-55 Front panel of the PIU
PIU
NEG1 RTN1 NEG2 RTN2 (-) (+) (-) (+)
-48V
-60V
Indicators
Table 3-106 Description of the power status indicators Indicator PWRA Status On (green) Off PWRB On (green) Off Description The power supply is connected. There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power supply is connected incorrectly. The power supply is connected. There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power supply is connected incorrectly.
Interfaces
The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 3-107 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU and their respective usage.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
PWRA
PWRB
3-125
3 Boards
Table 3-107 Description of the interfaces on the PIU Interface NEG1(-) RTN1(+) NEG2(-) RTN2(+) Interface Type -48 V power input interface BGND power input interface -48 V power input interface BGND power input interface Usage Inputs the -48 V power. Inputs the BGND power. Inputs the -48 V power. Inputs the BGND power.
Label
The label on the front panel indicates that the PIU accesses multiple power supplies.
CAUTION
Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment, ensure that these power supplies are disabled.
3.11.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the same as the physical slot. Figure 3-56 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 4
Figure 3-57 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 Slot 10 Slot 1 Slot 7 Slot 4 Slot 8 Slot 9

This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.
3 Boards
Table 3-108 lists the technical specifications for the PIU. Table 3-108 Technical specifications Item Dimensions Weight Power Consumption Input voltage Performance 41.4 mm (width) x 224.8 mm (depth) x 21.0 mm height) 0.12 kg < 0.5 W -38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.12 FAN
The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling. 3.12.1 Version Description The functional version of the FAN is TNC1. 3.12.2 Functions and Features The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status. 3.12.3 Working Principle The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speed adjustment unit, and board in-position unit. 3.12.4 Front Panel There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel. 3.12.5 Valid Slots The FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS should be the same as the physical slot. 3.12.6 Technical Specifications This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power consumption, and working voltage.

The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.

The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status. The FAN has the following functions and features:
l
Accesses one +12 V power supply for driving the three fans each of which consumes 6 W power.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
l
Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans and protects fans against overcurrent. Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the system with lowest power consumption and lowest noise. Reports the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position information. Provides alarm indicators. Disables the power supplies to the fans.
l l l

The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speed adjustment unit, and board in-position unit. Figure 3-58 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN. Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Three fans +12 V +12 V +12 V +12 V power shutdown signal Communication unit Start delay +12 V System control and communication unit
Inter-board communication bus Fan rotating speed
System control and communication unit System control and communication unit System control and communication unit
Rotating speed reporting unit PWM signal PWM driving unit Intelligent fan speed adjustment unit Board in-position unit
Fan in-position signal
Start-Delay Unit
This unit protects the fan power supplies against start delay and overcurrent.
Communication Unit
This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and ambient temperature information to the system control and communication unit. In addition, it provides the +12 V power shutdown signal to the start-delay unit.
3 Boards
Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Unit

This unit reports the fan rotating speed to the system control and communication unit and adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the three pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals that are received from the system control and communication unit. The PWM signals of the fans are isolated from each other. The system adjusts the fan rotating speed according to the working temperature, as listed in Table 3-109. Table 3-109 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed Working Temperature 25C 25C to 60C 60C Rotating Speed Low speed (3200 rotation/min) Linear increase in accordance with the temperature Full speed (16000 rotation/min)
Board In-Position Unit

This unit reports the board in-position information to the system control and communication unit.
3.12.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-59 shows the front panel of the FAN. Figure 3-59 Front panel of the FAN
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-129
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-110 Description of the fan status indicators Indicator FAN State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The fan is running normally. The fan is faulty. The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack

The ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to realize the proper grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l l
ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive. Fan warning label: warns you not to touch the fan leaves when the fan is rotating.
3.12.5 Valid Slots

The FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS should be the same as the physical slot. Figure 3-60 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 Slot 10 Slot 4
Figure 3-61 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 4 Slot 8 Slot 9

This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power consumption, and working voltage. Table 3-111 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
3 Boards
Table 3-111 Technical specifications for the FAN Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Performance 42.0 mm (width) x 217.6 mm (depth) x 28.5 mm height) 0.200 kg <2.3 W (room temprature) <17 W (high temperature) Working voltage 10.8 V-13.2 V (for accessing the 12 V DC power)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3-131
4 Accessories
4
About This Chapter
Accessories
The accessories of the OptiX RTN 910 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit (PDU). You need to select the accessories based on the actual requirements. 4.1 E1 Panel When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU. 4.2 PDU The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
4-1
4 Accessories
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU. The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1 panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 1-8 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 9-16
Interfaces
Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel Interface T1-T16 Description Transmit port of the 1st to 16th E1 ports (connected to the external equipment) Receive port of the 1st to 16th E1 ports (connected to the external equipment) 1st to 8th E1 ports (connected to an IDU) 9th to 16th E1 ports (connected to an IDU) Connecting a protection ground cable DB37 Type of Connector BNC
R1-R16
1-8 9-16 Grounding bolt
NOTE
The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer to Table 4-2.
4-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
4 Accessories
Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel) Pin 20 2 22 4 24 6 26 8 36 17 34 15 32 13 Signal 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+) 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (-) Pin 21 3 23 5 25 7 27 9 35 16 33 14 31 12 Signal 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 3nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (-)
4-3
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
4 Accessories
Pin 30 11 Others
Signal 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (-) Reserved
Pin 29 10 -
Signal 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) -
4.2 PDU
The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. 4.2.1 Front Panel There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of the PDU. 4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power to the equipment in a cabinet. 4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power distribution mode is used.
4.2.1 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of the PDU.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU
1 2 3 4
OUTPUT
B
ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OUTPUT
ON
OFF
20A 20A 20A 20A
INPUT
OFF
20A 20A 20A 20A
1. Output power terminals (A)
2. PGND terminals
4-4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3. Input power terminals 5. Power switches (A) 4. Output power terminals (B) 6. Power switches (B)
4 Accessories
Interfaces
Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU Position Output power terminals (A) PGND terminals Input power terminals Interface + Grounding stud of the two-hole OT terminal RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-) Output power terminals (B) Power switches (A) + 20 A Description Power output (+) Power output (-) For connecting the PGND cable
The first power input (+) The second power input (+) The first power input (-) The second power input (-) Power output (+) Power output (-) They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A side, respectively. They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B side, respectively.
Power switches (B)
20 A
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle

The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power to the equipment in a cabinet.
Functions
l l l l
The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power. Each input power supply supports four outputs. The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A. The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
4 Accessories
Working Principle
The PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers (MCBs). The PDU supports the simple power distribution function for the input power. Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
OUTPUT A
+ SW1 + + SW3 + SW4 1 2
INPUT
RTN1(+) BGND RTN2(+) NEG1(-) BGND NEG2(-)
SW2
3 4
OUTPUT B
+ SW1 + + SW4 + SW4 1 2
SW2
3 4
PGND
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode

The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power distribution mode is used. The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that is inside the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution Mode

When the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuits terminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND.
4-6
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
4 Accessories
Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode
DC-I Power Distribution Mode

To use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar. Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
4-7
5 Cables
5
About This Chapter
Cables
This topic describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignment information of various cables of the IDU 910. 5.1 Power Cable The power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example, the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU. 5.2 PGND Cable The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND cable. 5.3 IF Jumper The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU. 5.4 XPIC Cable The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of the XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function. 5.5 Fiber Jumper The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the OptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected. 5.6 E1 Cables The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment and E1 cable to the E1 panel. 5.7 Orderwire Cable The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the PHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the interface of the orderwire phone. 5.8 Network Cable
5 Cables
The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
5-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5 Cables
5.1 Power Cable

The power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example, the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
Single cord end terminal
1U DC connector
Power cable
Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable Model 2.5 mm2 power cable and terminal Cable Power Cable, 450 V/ 750 V, H07Z-K-2.5 mm2, Blue/Black, Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable Terminal Common Terminal, Single Cord End Terminal, Conductor Cross Section 2.5 mm2, 12.5 A, Insertion Depth 8 mm, Blue
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, the power cable whose core has a sectional area of 2.5 mm2 can extend for a maximum distance of 50 m.
5.2 PGND Cable

The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND cable. 5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the external equipment share the same ground. 5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
5 Cables
The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and the external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
Main label 1 Cable tie H.S.tube
L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignment
None.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and the external equipment share the same ground.
5-4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
Main label 1
L Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignment
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU. The IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper is terminated with a type-N connector and is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper is terminated with a TNC connector and is connected to the IF board.
NOTE
l l
The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Thus, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper is not required. When the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2inch IF cable to the IF board.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5-5
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1 H.S.tube 2 PCS L = 3 cm 2
2000 mm 1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female
Pin Assignment
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable

The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of the XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function. The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-IN port of one IFX2 board of an XPIC working group, and the other end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other IFX2 board of the same XPIC working group. When the XPIC function of an IFX2 board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the X-IN port and X-OUT port of the IFX2 board to loop back signals. The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:
l
XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long, and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the horizontal direction. XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is very short, and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the vertical direction. The XPIC cable using straight connectors is also used to connect the X-IN port and X-OUT port of the same IFX2 board to loop back signals.
The OptiX RTN 910 uses the XPIC cables with angle connectors.
5-6
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable
1 1
L1
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male
Cable Connection Table

None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper

The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the OptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers Connector 1 LC/PC Connector 2 FC/PC Cable 2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to the 1000Base-SX GE optical interfaces.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5-7
5 Cables
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector, SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector. Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector
5-8
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5 Cables
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector
5.6 E1 Cables
The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment and E1 cable to the E1 panel. 5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals directly to the external equipment. 5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel. 5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable An E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU. The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment

The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals directly to the external equipment. Each E1 cable to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. The E1 cables to the external equipment are categorized into two types, namely, 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5-9
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 E1 cable
Main label 1 W
X1
A View A Pos.96 Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Female Connector
Pos .1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
NOTE
l l
The appearance of the 120ohm E1 cable is the same as the appearance of the 75ohm E1 cable. The core of a 75ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use 2.5 mm (0.098inch) crimp pliers to terminate the ends of E1 cables on the DDF frame with 7511 coaxial connectors.
Pin Assignment
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable Pin W1 Core 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5-10
Serial No. 1
Remark s
Pin
W2 Core Serial No. 2
Remark s
Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
R1
25 26
Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
T1
R2
27 28
T2
R3
29 30
T3
R4
31 32
T4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5 Cables
Pin
Remark s
Pin
Remark s
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Shell
Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid
R5
33 34
Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid
T5
11
R6
35 36
12
T6
13
R7
37 38
14
T7
15
R8
39 40
16
T8
17
R9
41 42
18
T9
19
R10
43 44
20
T10
21
R11
45 46
22
T11
23
R12
47 48
24
T12
25
R13
73 74
26
T13
27
R14
75 76
28
T14
29
R15
77 78
30
T15
31
R16
79 80 Shell
32
T16
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5-11
5 Cables
Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable Pin W1 Color of the Core 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 White Blue White Green White Grey Red Orange Red Brown Black Blue Black Green Black Grey White Blue White Green White Grey Red Orange Red Brown Relatio n Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Remark s Pin W2 Color of the Core 25 26 R2 27 28 R3 29 30 R4 31 32 R5 33 34 R6 35 36 R7 37 38 R8 39 40 R9 41 42 R10 43 44 R11 45 46 R12 47 48 R13 73 74 White Orange White Brown Red Blue Red Green Red Grey Black Orange Black Brown Yellow Blue White Orange White Brown Red Blue Red Green Red Grey Relatio n Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Remark s
R1
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
5-12
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5 Cables
Pin
W1 Color of the Core Relatio n Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair
Remark s
Pin
W2 Color of the Core Relatio n Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair
Remark s
51 52 53 54 55 56 Shell
Black Blue Black Green Black Grey Braid
R14
75 76
Black Orange Black Brown Yellow Blue Braid
T14
R15
77 78
T15
R16
79 80 Shell
T16
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel

The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel. Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel
Pos.1 A X1 B Pos.1 Pos.37 B X2
Pos.44 A
1500 mm
X1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male X2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5-13
5 Cables

Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel Connector X1 X1.38 X1.23 X1.37 X1.22 X1.36 X1.21 X1.35 X1.20 X1.15 X1.30 X1.14 X1.29 X1.13 X1.28 X1.12 X1.27 Shell Connector X2 X2.20 X2.2 X2.22 X2.4 X2.24 X2.6 X2.26 X2.8 X2.21 X2.3 X2.23 X2.5 X2.25 X2.7 X2.27 X2.9 Braid T4 T3 T2 T1 R4 R3 R2 Remarks R1 Connector X1 X1.34 X1.19 X1.33 X1.18 X1.32 X1.17 X1.31 X1.16 X1.11 X1.26 X1.10 X1.25 X1.9 X1.24 X1.8 X1.7 Shell Connector X2 X2.36 X2.17 X2.34 X2.15 X2.32 X2.13 X2.30 X2.11 X2.35 X2.16 X2.33 X2.14 X2.31 X2.12 X2.29 X2.10 Braid T8 T7 T6 T5 R8 R7 R6 Remarks R5
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable

An E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU. The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel. An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 interface or a 120-ohm E1 interface.
5-14
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors
View B
Pos.44 #4-40
M092
Label 2
Main Label
Pos.1
X3
W2 W1
Label 1
2 X2 400
X1
X1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"
X2/X3. Cable connector, type-D, 44 female Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors Wire W1 Connecto r X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.26 X1.25 X1.4 X1.3 X1.28 X1.27 X1.6 X1.5
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.38 X2.23 X2.15 X2.30 X2.37 X2.22 X2.14 X2.29 X2.36 X2.21
Remarks R1
Connecto r X1 X1.10 X1.9
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.34 X2.19 X2.11 X2.26 X2.33 X2.18 X2.10 X2.25 X2.32 X2.17
Remarks R5
T1
X1.34 X1.33
T5
R2
X1.12 X1.11
R6
T2
X1.36 X1.35
T6
R3
X1.14 X1.13
R7
5-15
5 Cables
Wire
Connecto r X1 X1.30 X1.29 X1.8 X1.7 X1.32 X1.31
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.13 X2.28 X2.35 X2.20 X2.12 X2.27 X3.38 X3.23 X3.15 X3.30 X3.37 X3.22 X3.14 X3.29 X3.36 X3.21 X3.13 X3.28 X3.35 X3.20 X3.12 X3.27 Braid
Remarks T3
Connecto r X1 X1.38 X1.37
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.9 X2.24 X2.31 X2.16 X2.8 X2.7 X3.34 X3.19 X3.11 X3.26 X3.33 X3.18 X3.10 X3.25 X3.32 X3.17 X3.9 X3.24 X3.31 X3.16 X3.8 X3.7 Braid
Remarks T7
R4
X1.16 X1.15
R8
T4
X1.40 X1.39
T8
W2
X1.18 X1.17 X1.42 X1.41 X1.20 X1.19 X1.44 X1.43 X1.22 X1.21 X1.46 X1.45 X1.24 X1.23 X1.48 X1.47 Shell
R9
X1.50 X1.49
R13
T9
X1.74 X1.73
T13
R10
X1.52 X1.51
R14
T10
X1.76 X1.75
T14
R11
X1.54 X1.53
R15
T11
X1.78 X1.77
T15
R12
X1.56 X1.55
R16
T12
X1.80 X1.79 Shell
T16
5.7 Orderwire Cable

The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the PHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the interface of the orderwire phone.
5-16
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable
1
6
Main label
6
X1
X2
1. Orderwire interface, RJ-11 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable Connector X1 X1.3 X1.4 Connector X2 X2.3 X2.4 Function Tip Ring
5.8 Network Cable

The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with RJ-45 connectors. Two types of interfaces use the RJ-45 connectors, which are the medium dependent interface (MDI) and MDI-X. The MDI interface is used by the terminal equipment, for example, the network card. For the pin assignment information of the MDI interface, see Table 5-8. The MDIX interface is used by the network equipment. For the pin assignment information of the MDIX interface, see Table 5-9. Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 TX+ TXRX+ Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ Function Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+)
5-17
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5 Cables
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function Receiving data (-) -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)
4 5 6 7 8
Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)
Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables are used between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between the straight through cable and crossover cable is with regard to the pin assignment. The NMS/COM interface, NE interface, and Ethernet service electrical interfaces of the OptiX RTN 910 support the MDI and MDI-X autosensing modes. Straight through cables and crossover
5 Cables
cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM interface, EXT interface, and Ethernet service electrical interfaces to MDI or MDI-X interfaces.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Network cable
1 Label 1 Main Label Label 2 8 1
8 1
1. Network port connector, RJ-45
Pin Assignment
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable Connector X1 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Connector X2 X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8 Color White/Orange Orange White/Green Green Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Relation Twisted pair
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable Connector X1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.1 X1.2 X1.4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4
Color Orange White/Orange White/Green Green Blue
Relation Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
5-19
5 Cables
Connector X1 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8
Connector X2 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8
Color White/Blue White/Brown Brown
Relation
Twisted pair
5-20
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A Parameters Description
Parameters Description
This topic describes the parameters used in this document. A.1 Parameters for NE Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs). A.2 Parameters for Cable Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables. A.3 Parameters for Communications Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management. A.4 Radio Link Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links. A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP). A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services. A.7 Clock Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks. A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services. A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol. A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (OAM). A.11 QoS Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS. A.12 RMON Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances. A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces. A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-1
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces. A.15 Parameters for Overhead This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
A-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs). A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs. A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation. A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs. A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs. A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE time. A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key. A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions of an NE.
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
On the Main Topology, choose File > Discovery > NE.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-3
Parameters for the Search Field

Parameter Address Type Value Range IP Address of GNE NSAP Address IP Address Range of GNE
l
Default Value IP Address Range of GNE
Description
l
If the OSI protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on NSAP Address only. If the IP protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE. To search for all the NEs that communicate with the gateway NE, select IP Address Range of GNE. To select the gateway NE only, select IP Address of GNE.
NOTE If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and if the U2000 (server) and the gateway NE are located in different network segments, ensure that the U2000 and relevant routers are configured with the IP routes for the network segment in which the U2000 and gateway NE are located. If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the OSI protocol stack is installed.
A-4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Search Address
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE, enter the IP address of the gateway NE, such as 129.9.x.x. If Address Type is set to IP Address Range of GNE, enter the number of the IP network segment in which the gateway NE is located, such as 129.9.255.255. If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, enter the NSAP address of the gateway NE.
User Name
This parameter specifies the user name of the gateway NE. This parameter specifies the password of the gateway NE.
Password
Parameter for Searching for NEs

Parameter Search for NE Value Range Selected Deselected Default Value Selected Description This parameter specifies whether to search for all the NEs in the specified domain.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-5
Parameter Create NE after search
Value Range Selected Deselected
Default Value Deselected
Description
l
To create NEs in batches, it is recommended that you select Create NE after search. The NEs are automatically created after they are found. After Create NE after search is selected, enter NE User and Password that are used for creating an NE.
NOTE If only Create NE after search is selected, Search for NE is selected automatically.
NE User
This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created. This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected. This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected. This parameter specifies whether to automatically upload the NE data after the NE is found and created. If only Upload after create is selected, Search for NE and Create NE after search are selected automatically.
Password
Upload after create
Selected Deselected
Deselected
A-6
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter for the Found NEs

Parameter NE ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the found NE, which consists of extended ID and NE ID. For example, in the case of NE9-25, the value 9 indicates the extended ID, and the value 25 indicates the NE ID. This parameter indicates the address of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE. This parameter indicates the ID of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE.
l
GNE Address
GNE ID
Created As GNE
Yes No
Yes
This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.
Connection Mode
Common Security SSL
Common
The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL. This parameter specifies the communication port. This parameter indicates whether the found NE is created.
Port NE Status
Created Uncreated
1400 -
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-7
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the Physical View, right-click New > NE. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface

Parameter Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the type of the NE to be created.
l
ID
The ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.
Extended ID
1 to 254
If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change the extended ID.
l
Name
This parameter specifies the name of the NE. After you specifies the name of the NE, the name is displayed under the icon of the NE.
Remarks
This parameter specifies the remarks of the NE.
A-8
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Gateway Type
Value Range Non-Gateway Gateway
Default Value Non-Gateway
Description
l
This parameter is set to Gateway if the new NE is a gateway NE. This parameter is set to Non-Gateway if the new NE is a nongateway NE. This parameter is set according to the DCN planning if the new NE can function as a gateway NE or a nongateway NE.
Affiliated Gateway
This parameter indicates the gateway NE of the new NE when Gateway Type is set to Non-Gateway.
l
Affiliated Gateway Protocol
IP OSI
IP
This parameter needs to be set when Gateway Type is set to Gateway. When the OSI over DCC solution is used, this parameter is set to OSI. In other cases, this parameter is set to IP.
IP Address
This parameter indicates the IP address of the new NE. This parameter needs to be set when Affiliated Gateway Protocol is set to IP. The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL. This parameter specifies the communication port. This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created.
Connection Mode
Common Security SSL
Common
Port NE User
1400 -
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-9
Parameter Password
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. This parameter indicates the NSAP address of the new NE. This parameter needs to be set when Affiliated Gateway Protocol is set to OSI. You need to set the area ID only, and the other parts are automatically generated by the NE.
NSAP Address
A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified. Choose Object Attributes. Click Modify NE ID.
Parameters for Changing NE IDs

Parameter New ID Value Range Default Value Description
l
The new ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.
A-10
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter New Extended ID
Value Range 1 to 254
Default Value 9
Description If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change the extended ID.
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization

Parameter NE Name NE ID Synchronous Mode Value Range Standard NTP NM Null
l
Default Value Null
Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the ID of the NE.
l
If this parameter is set to NM, the NE synchronizes the time of the NMS server. If this parameter is set to Standard NTP, the NE synchronizes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server through the standard NTP.
Standard NTP Authentication
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
This parameter is valid only when Synchronous Mode is set to Standard NTP.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-11
Parameters for the Standard NTP Server

Parameter Standard NTP Server Identifier Value Range NE ID IP
l
Default Value NE ID
Description
l
If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to IP. If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the HWECC protocol, this parameter is set to NE ID. If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the IP protocol, this parameter is set to IP. If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to the IP address of the external NTP server. If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE, this parameter is set to the ID or IP address of the gateway NE. If the NTP server does not need to authenticated, this parameter is set to the value "0". If the NTP server needs to be authenticated, the authentication is performed according to the allocated key of the NTP server. In this case, the NE authenticates the NTP server based on the key and the corresponding password (specified in the management of the standard NTP key).
Standard NTP Server
Standard NTP Server Key
0 to 1024
A-12
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization

Parameter Synchronization Starting Time Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter specifies the start time of the synchronization period. After this parameter is specified, the NMS and the NE synchronize the time once at the intervals of Synchronization Period(days). It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter indicates whether Synchronization Starting Time is the daylight saving time. This parameter is set according to the actual situation. This parameter indicates the period of synchronizing the time of the NE with the time of the NMS. It is recommended that you use the default value.
DST
Selected Deselected
Deselected
Synchronization Period (days)
1 to 300
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE time.
Navigation Path
1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization Management. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click .
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-13
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time

Parameter NE TimeZone DST Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the time zone. This parameter indicates whether DST is enabled.
Parameters for Time Zone

Parameter Time Zone Value Range Default Value Description
l
After the time zone is changed, the current time of the NE is changed accordingly. This parameter is set according to the place where the NE is located. The parameters related to daylight saving time can be valid only when this parameter is selected. This parameter is set according to the situation whether daylight saving time is used in the place where the NE is located.
DST
Selected Deselected
Deselected
Offset
1 to 120 Unit: minute(s)
This parameter specifies the offset value of the daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the method of adjusting the daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the start daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the method of adjusting the daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the end daylight saving time.
Start Rule
DATE WEEK
WEEK
Start Time End Rule
DATE WEEK
WEEK
End Time
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
A-14
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.

Parameter NE Name NE ID Key Value Range 1 to 1024 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the ID of the NE.
l
This parameter indicates the key for NTP authentication. This parameter is set according to the requirements of the external NTP server. This parameter indicates the password that corresponds to Key. This parameter is set according to the requirements of the external NTP server.
Password
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-15
Parameter Trusted
Value Range Yes No
Default Value Yes
Description
l
When this parameter is set to No, the key verification is not trusted. After receiving the key, the NE rejects the clock synchronization service. When this parameter is set to Yes, the key verification is trusted. After receiving the key, the NE provides the clock synchronization service. After receiving an unknown or incorrect key, the NE rejects the clock synchronization service. Hence, it is recommended that you set a trusted key only.
A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions of an NE.
Navigation Path
1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and then click .
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs

Parameter NE Name NE Type Value Range OptiX RTN 910 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
A-16
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Operation Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the type of the operation, such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser. This parameter specifies whether to automatically disable the operations such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser. This parameter specifies the time of automatically disabling the operations such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Auto Disabling
Disabled Enabled
Enabled
Auto Disabling Time(min)
1 to 2880
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables. A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers. A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers. A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the Main Menu. Select the board of the NE on which the fiber needs to be searched for or the IF board of the NE on which radio links need to be searched for from the Subject Tree, and the click . 3. Click Search.
Parameters for Searching For Fibers

Parameter Source NE Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the source NE on which fibers or radio links are found.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-17
Parameter Source Board
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the board and slot of the source NE on which fibers or radio links are found. This parameter indicates the number of the port on the board of the source NE on which fibers or radio links are found. This parameter indicates the name of the sink NE on which fibers or radio links are found. This parameter indicates the board and slot of the sink NE on which fibers or radio links are found. This parameter indicates the number of the port on the board of the sink NE on which fibers or radio links are found. This parameter indicates the level of the found fiber or the working mode of the found radio link. This parameter indicates the name of the found fiber or radio link. This parameter indicates the direction of the found fiber. This parameter indicates whether the found fiber or radio link conflicts with the fiber or radio link displayed on the NMS. This parameter indicates whether the cable is created successfully. This parameter indicates the type of the found fiber or cable.
Source Port
Sink NE
Sink Board
Sink Port
Level
Name
Direction
Two-Fiber Bidirectional Single-Fiber Unidirectional
Conflict with logical link (Y/N)
Yes No
Operation Result
Succeeded Failed
Fiber/Cable Type
A-18
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is displayed. Choose Link > Fiber from the Object Tree.
Parameters for Fibers

Parameter Create Ways Value Range Common Ways Batch Ways
l
Default Value Common Ways
Description
l
If Common Ways is selected, fibers need to created one by one. If Batch Ways is selected, fibers can be created in batches.
Fiber/Cable Type
Fiber
Fiber
This parameter indicates that Fiber/Cable Type to be created is a fiber. This parameter specifies the name of the fiber to be created. The name consists of up to 255 characters, excluding certain special marks such as | * ? " < >. This parameter specifies the remark information customized by the user. This parameter specifies the source NE on which the fiber needs to be created. This parameter specifies the board, slot, and port of the source NE on which the fiber needs to be created. This parameter indicates the level that corresponds to the port on the board.
A-19
Name
Remarks
Source NE
Source NE Slot-Board Type-Port
Rate Level
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Medium Type
Value Range G.652 G.653 G.654 G.655
Default Value G.652
Description This parameter specifies the medium type of the fiber.
Sink NE
This parameter specifies the sink NE on which the fiber needs to be created. This parameter specifies the board, slot, and port of the sink NE on which the fiber needs to be created. This parameter specifies the direction of the fiber to be created. This parameter specifies the length of the fiber to be created. This parameter specifies the attenuation of the fiber to be created. This parameter specifies the time when the fiber is created. This parameter specifies the name of the person who creates the fiber. This parameter specifies the name of the person who maintains the fiber.
Sink NE Slot-Board Type-Port
Direction
Two-Fiber Bidirectional Single-Fiber Unidirectional
Length(km)
Attenuation(dB)
Created On
Creator
Maintainer
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is displayed. Choose Link > Microwave Link from the Object Tree.
A-20
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Microwave Links

Parameter Fiber/Cable Type Value Range Radio Link Default Value Radio Link Description This parameter indicates that a radio link needs to be created is Fiber/Cable Type. This parameter specifies the name of the radio link to be created. The name consists of up to 255 characters, excluding certain special marks such as | * ? " < >. This parameter specifies the remark information customized by the user. The parameter specifies the source NE on which the radio link needs to be created. This parameter specifies the board, slot, and port of the source NE on which the radio link needs to be created. This parameter indicates the level that corresponds to the port on the IF board. The parameter specifies the sink NE on which the radio link needs to be created. This parameter specifies the board, slot, and port of the sink NE on which the radio link needs to be created. This parameter specifies the length of the radio link to be created. This parameter indicates the time when the radio link is created.
Name
Remarks
Source NE
Source NE Slot-Board Type-Port
Rate Level
Sink NE
Sink NE Slot-Board Type-Port
Length(km)
Created On
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-21
Parameter Creator
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the name of the person who creates the radio link. This parameter specifies the name of the person who maintains the radio link.
Maintainer
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management. A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting. A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate. A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management. A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports. A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management. A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management. A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes. A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings. A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP. A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol model. A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables. A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels. A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN. A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting
A-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN. A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN. A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS. A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting

Parameter IP Address Value Range Default Value Before delivery, the IP address of the NE is set to 129.9.0.x. The letter x indicates the basic ID. 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 Description In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set according to the following rules: l The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the gateway NE should meet the planning requirements of the external DCN. l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP address must be in the same network segment. l The IP address of other NEs should be set according to the NE ID. In this case, the IP address of an NE should be set in the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address should be set to 129.9.0.1.
l
Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask
Extended ID
1 to 254
Do not change the extended ID when the number of actual NEs does not exceed the range permitted by the basic NE ID. It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
Connection Mode
Common Security SSL
Common
The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-23
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port that is connected to the DCC channel.
NOTE On the NMS interface, the first interface on the system control, switching, and clock board (like 1-CSHC-1) corresponds to its external clock interface.
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled Disabled
Enabled (for line ports) Disabled (for external clock interfaces)
It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases:
l
If the port is connected to the other ECC subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. If the port is connected to a third-party network and does not exchange the network management information with other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. If external clock interfaces are used to transparently transmit the DCC solution, Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for the external clock interfaces.
Channel Type
D1-D3 D4-D12 D1-D12 D1-D1
D1-D1 (for the PDH radio whose transmission capacity is less than 16xE1) D1-D3 (for other cases)
It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases:
l
If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Channel Type for the SDH line ports is set to a value that is the same as the value for third-party network. If the DCC transparent transmission solution is adopted, the value of Channel Type for the SDH line ports should not conflict with the value that is set for the third-party network.
A-24
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter DCC Resources Communication Status Protocol Type
Value Range HWECC TCP/IP OSI
Default Value HWECC
Description This parameter indicates the DCC resources. This parameter indicates the communication status. It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases:
l
If the IP over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP. If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to OSI. This parameter is valid only when Protocol Type is set to OSI. In the case of a DCC channel, LAPD Role must be set to User for one end and must be set to Network for the other end.
LAPD Role
User Network
User
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management

Parameter Source Timeslot/ Porta Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the source timeslot or port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-25
Parameter Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Source Port
Value Range D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 E1 E2 F1 K1 K2 X1 X2 X3 X4
Default Value -
Description
l
Only one overhead byte can be selected each time. X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the customized overhead bytes that are used for transmitting asynchronous data services. An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is used. For example, an overhead byte cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
Sink Timeslot/ Porta
This parameter indicates the sink timeslot or port.
A-26
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port
Value Range D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 E1 E2 F1 K1 K2 X1 X2 X3 X4
Default Value -
Description
l
Only one overhead byte can be selected each time. An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is used. For example, an overhead byte cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel. Generally, Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be set to a value that is the same as or different from the value in the case of Source Timeslot/Port.
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-27
Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode

Parameter ECC Extended Mode Value Range Automatically Assign Specified mode Default Value Automatically Assign Description It is recommended that you use the default value.
Parameters for Setting the Server

Parameter IP Port Value Range 1601 to 1699 Default Value 0.0.0.0 1601 Description This parameter indicates the IP address of the server.
l
This parameter is valid only when ECC Extended Mode is set to Specified mode. This parameter can be set only when the NE functions as the server of the extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE that is close to the U2000 functions as the server. This parameter can be set to any value from 1601 to 1699.
Parameters for Setting the Client

Parameter Opposite IP Port Value Range 1601 to 1699 Default Value 0.0.0.0 1601
l
Description
l
This parameter is valid only when ECC Extended Mode is set to Specified mode. This parameter can be set only when the NE functions as the client of the extended ECC. Except for the NE that functions as the server, all other NEs that use the extended ECC can function as the client. Opposite IP and Port are respectively set to the IP address of the server NE and the specified pot number.
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
A-28
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.
Parameter for NE ECC Link Management

Parameter Destination NE Transfer NE Distance Value Range 0 to 64 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies the sink NE of the ECC connection. This parameter specifies the next transfer NE and the direction of the ECC route.
l
This parameter specifies the number of NEs (excluding the source NE and sink NE) through which the ECC route passes, namely, the number of ECC packet forwarding attempts. The value can be set to a value that is greater than the number of actual ECC packet forwarding attempts. If the value is set to a value that is less than the number of actual ECC packet forwarding attempts, however, the destination NE fails to be accessed. If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the source NE is adjacent to the destination NE. This parameter indicates that multiple ECC routes from the source NE to the destination NE may be available. An ECC route of a higher priority is selected to transmit the packets to the destination NE. If the ECC route is generated automatically, the priority is 4. If the ECC route is added manually, the priority is 5.
Level
4 5
Mode
Manual Automatic
This parameter indicates the ECC routing mode. This parameter specifies the physical port through which the ECC route passes. The value of this parameter is automatically assigned the NE.
SCC No.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-29
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management

Parameter Destination Address Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the destination address of the packets. This parameter can be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or C only, but cannot be set to the IP address of the local host or the loopback address with the 127 field. This parameter indicates the subnet mask of the destination address of the packets. This parameter specifies the IP address of the gateway on the subnetwork where the NE is located, namely, the IP address of the next hop of the packets.
l
Mask Gateway IP
Protocol
DIRECT STATIC OSPF RIP OSPF_ASE OSPF_NSSA
DIRECT: indicates the route between the local NE and an adjacent NE. STATIC: indicates the route that is created manually. OSPF: indicates the route between the local NE and a non-adjacent NE. RIP: indicates the route that is discovered by the routing information protocol. OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose Destination Address is beyond the OSPF domain. OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose Destination Address is in a not so stubby area (NSSA). A route can be deleted in the case of STATIC only, but cannot be edited in the other cases. Compared with a dynamic route, a static route has a higher priority. If any conflict occurs, the static route is preferred.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-30
Parameter Interface
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the interface that is used on the route. Interface is a concept specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create multiple types of interface, such as a loopback interface (namely, the interface whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet interface, and PPP interface. Each interface must have a unique interface name. This parameter indicates the maximum number of routers through which the packets are transmitted. Hop Count is used to indicate the overhead bytes that are transmitted to the destination address. The smaller the value, the less the overhead bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same destination address, a route whose overhead is less is preferred to transmit the packets. This parameter indicates whether the current IP route is available.
Hop Count
0 to 65535
Working Status
Working Unworking
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the IP Route Management tab. Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes

Parameter Destination Address Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the destination address of the packets. This parameter can be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or C only, but cannot be set to the IP address of the local host or the loopback address with the 127 field. This parameter indicates the subnet mask of the destination address of the packets.
A-31
Subnet Mask
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Gateway
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the IP address of the gateway on the subnetwork where the NE is located, namely, the IP address of the next hop of the packets.
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings

This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Parameter Area Value Range Default Value Description
l
The OSPF protocol supports the division of NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEs in the same area can transmit the OSPF packets to each other to generate the route. When setting the area for the NEs, you need to set the NEs that run the OSPF protocol to the same area. DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello packet timer at the DCC interface. The Hello packets are used for detecting the neighbor router on the network that is connected to the router. By periodically transmitting the hello packets, you can determine whether the interface on the neighbor router is still in the active status. DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the interval for the hello packet timer to transmit the hello packets. In the case of two interconnected NEs, DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the same value.
DCC Hello Timer (s)
1 to 255
A-32
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s)
Default Value 6
Description
l
DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies the dead time of a neighbor router at the DCC interface. If the local router fails to receive the hello packets from the connected neighbor router within the time specified in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers that the neighbor router is unavailable. DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be set to a value that is a minimum of twice the value of DCC Hello Timer(s). In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally.
DCC Retransmission Timer(s) DCC Delay(s)
1 to 65535
DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies the interval for transmitting a request through the DCC interface to retransmit the link state advertisement (LSA) packets.
l
1 to 3600
DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time to transmit the LSA packets through the DCC interface. The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time elapses, but are not aged when they are being transmitted on the network. Hence, before the LSA packets are transmitted, you need to increase the age of the LSA packets based on the value of DCC Delay (s). DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello packet timer at the LAN interfaces. The hello packets are used for detecting the neighbor router on the network that is connected to the router. By periodically transmitting the hello packets, you can determine whether the interface on the neighbor router is still in the active status. LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the interval for the hello packet timer of the NE to transmit the hello packets. In the case of two interconnected NEs, LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the same value.
LAN Hello Timer (s)
1 to 255
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-33
Parameter LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s)
Default Value -
Description
l
LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies the dead time of a neighbor router at the LAN interface. If the local router fails to receive the hello packets from the connected neighbor router within the time specified in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers that the neighbor router is unavailable. LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be set to a value that is a minimum of two times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s). In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally.
LAN Retransmission Timer(s) LAN Delay(s)
1 to 65535
LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies the time for transmitting a request for retransmission of the LSA packets through the LAN interface.
l
1 to 3600
LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time to transmit the LSA packets through the LAN interface. The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time elapses, but are not aged when they are being transmitted on the network. Hence, before the LSA packets are transmitted, you need to increase the age of the LSA packets based on the value of LAN Delay (s).
A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the Proxy ARP tab.
A-34
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP

Parameter Proxy ARP Value Range Disabled Enabled
l
Default Value Disabled
Description
l
The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to communicate with each other. To realize communication between such NEs, the source NE sends the ARP broadcast packet to address the route to the destination NE. The NE with the proxy ARP function enabled checks the routing table after sensing the ARP broadcast packet. If the routing table contains the destination address that the ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE returns a ARP spoofing packet, which enables the NE that sends the ARP broadcast packet to consider that the MAC address of the NE that returns the ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address of the destination NE. In this manner, the packet that is to be sent to the destination NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy ARP function enabled and then forwarded to the destination NE.
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol model.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters

Parameter NE Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-35
Parameter Configuration Role
Value Range L1 L2
Default Value L1
Description
l
Configuration Role cannot be set to ES. An NE whose Configuration Role is set to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an NE in the other area. It uses a route in the local area only and access the other area by distributing the default route of the nearest L2 NE. An NE whose Configuration Role is set to L2 can function as a neighbor of an NE in the other area and can use a route in the backbone area. The backbone area is a collection that is formed by consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE of all the roles must be consecutive (connected to each other).
Current Role
This parameter indicates the current role.
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the Routing Table tab.
Parameters for Routing Tables

Parameter Port Data Link Layer Adjacency No. Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port used for OSI communication. This parameter indicates the protocol that is used at the data link layer.
l
This parameter specifies the identifier of the adjacency that is set up by two NEs through the OSI protocol. One adjacency number corresponds to an OSI adjacency. The value is dynamically allocated by the NE.
Adjacency Type
This parameter indicates the type of the adjacency.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-36
Parameter Adjacency State Peer End Area ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the state of the adjacency. This parameter indicates the area ID that is contained in the NSAP address of the opposite NE. This parameter indicates the system ID of the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID is the MAC address. This parameter indicates the area ID of the destination NE. This parameter indicates the system ID of the destination NE. Generally, the system ID is the MAC address. ++This parameter indicates the number of hops that reach the destination NE or destination area. This parameter indicates the number of the adjacent link that is connected to the destination NE. This parameter indicates the number of the adjacent link that is connected to the destination NE.
Peer End System ID Destination Area ID Destination SYSID
Metric
Adjacency No.1
Adjacency No.2
A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes

Parameter Remote IP Address Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the IP address of the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-37
Parameter LAPD Actor
Value Range User Network
Default Value User
Description
l l
This parameter specifies the LAPD actor. If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol, they can perform the LAPD negotiation only when the LAPD actor is set to User at one end and is set to Network at the other end.
Efficient LAPD Enable Configurable LAPD Enable
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the current LAPD is enabled. This parameter specifies whether the LAPD is enabled.
LAPD Parameters
Parameter Remote IP Address L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) Value Range 1 to 20 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the IP address of the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
l
This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time to Retry(s). L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the interval for retransmitting packets at the LAPD link layer. L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a greater value. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
A-38
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter L2 Retry Times
Value Range 2 to 6
Default Value 3
Description
l
This parameter specifies L2 Retry Times. L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum number of packet retransmission attempts at the LAPD link layer. L2 Retry Times needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L2 Retry Times can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L2 Retry Times to a greater value. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer (s). L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello packet timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for periodical transmission of the Hello packets. The Hello timer determines the interval for transmitting the Hello packets once. L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 Hello Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
L3 Hello Timer(s)
1 to 100
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-39
Parameter L3 ES Timer(s)
Default Value 50
Description
l
This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer (s). L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES configuration timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for setting the time to transmit the configuration information on the ES route. L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 ES Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer (s). L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS configuration timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for setting the time to transmit the configuration information through the L1/L2 router. L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 IS Timer (s) to a smaller value. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
L3 IS Timer(s)
1 to 200
10
A-40
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter L3 Hold Timer(s)
Value Range 2 to 63
Default Value 5
Description
l
This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer (s). L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold timer at the LAPD link network layer. L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 Hold Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter specifies COST. COST indicates the overhead value of the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the OSI tunnel. The overhead value determines whether this link is perverted. If the overhead value is smaller, this link has a higher priority to be selected. This parameter needs to set according to the planning information.
COST
1 to 63
20
l l
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-41
Parameters for Bandwidth Management

Parameter Ethernet Board VLAN ID Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value 4094 Description
l
The equipment on the traditional DCN can be connected to the NMS through the SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 910 can also be connected to the NMS through an Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is used to carry the network management information, the NE differentiates the network management information and Ethernet service information according to the VLAN ID. If the default VLAN ID of the inband DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the service, the VLAN ID of the inband DCN can be changed manually. The same VLAN ID must be, however, is used on the network-wide inband DCN.
Bandwidth(kbps) E1 Port Bandwidth(kbps) Tunnel Bandwidth (kbps) IF Port Bandwidth (kbps)
This parameter specifies the bandwidth of the inband DCN. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.
A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting FE or GE Ports

Parameter Port Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the FE or GE port.
A-42
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Enable Status
Value Range Enabled Disabled
Default Value Enabled
Description
l
This parameter specifies whether the FE or GE port is enabled. The inband DCN can transmit the network management information over the link only after the inband DCN function is enabled at the FE or GE ports at both ends of a link.
Parameters for Setting IF Ports

Parameter Port Name Enable Status Value Range Enabled Disabled
l
Description This parameter indicates the name of the IF port.

l
This parameter specifies whether the IF port is enabled. The inband DCN can transmit the network management information over the link only after the IF ports at both ends of a link are enabled on the inband DCN.
A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting a Protocol

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description Displays the port name.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-43
Parameter Protocol Type
Value Range IP HWECC
Default Value IP
Description
l
If the values of ProtocolType are different from each other, the equipment at both ends cannot be interconnected with each other. Therefore, Protocol Type must be set to the same value for the equipment at both ends of a link. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to IP.
A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control

Parameter The First Network Port Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Enabled Description After The First Network Port is set to Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports

Parameter Enable Serial Port Access Access Command Line Access NM Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Default Value Selected Description After Enable Serial Port Access is selected, the NE can access the NMS or command lines through the serial port. If Access Command Line is selected, the serial interface can be used to access the command line terminal. If Access NM is selected, the serial interface can be used to access the NMS.
A-44
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Baud Rate
Value Range 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200
Default Value 9600
Description
l
This parameter specifies the data transmission rate in the communications through serial ports. This parameter is set according to the rate of the serial port at the opposite end, and the rates at both ends must be the same.
A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for LCT Access Control

Parameter NE Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-45
Parameter LCT Access Control Switch
Value Range Access Allowed Disable Access
Default Value Access Allowed
Description
l
No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this case, when the LCT requests an LCT user to log in to the NE, the NE does not check the status of LCT Access Control Switch, and directly allows the LCT user to log in to the NE. An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In this case, when the LCT requests an LCT user to log in to the NE, the NE determines whether to allow the LCT user to log in to the NE through the LCT according to the status of LCT Access Control Switch. An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In this case, when the NMS requests an NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS user can directly log in to the NE. After the NMS user successfully logs in to the NE, the online LCT user is not affected. When both the LCT user and NMS user log in to the NE, the online LCT user is not affected after LCT Access Control Switch is set to Disable Access.
A.4 Radio Link Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links. A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group. A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection. A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group. A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection. A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
A-46
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the XPIC tab. Click New.
Parameters
Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range 28M 56M
l
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the working bandwidth of the radio link. When this parameter is set to 56M, the high-power ODU must be used. This parameter indicates the polarization direction of a radio link. It is recommended that you set the IF port on the IFX2 board that has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V and the IF port on the other IFX2 board to Link ID-H. Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H. A link ID is an identifier of a radio link and is used to prevent the radio links between sites from being wrongly connected. When the link ID received by an NE is different from the link ID set for the NE, the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS. These two parameters are set according to the planning information. These two parameters must be set to different values, but Link ID-V must be set to the same value at both ends of a link and Link ID-H must also be set to the same value at both ends of a link.
Polarization direction-V Polarization direction-H
l l
Link ID-V Link ID-H
1 to 4094
1 2
l l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-47
Parameter Transmit Power (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the transmit power of an ODU. The value of this parameter must not exceed the rated power range supported by the ODU. The transmit power of the ODU must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module.. This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter indicates the channel central frequency. The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)
Transmission Frequency(MHz)
A-48
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and the receiver. If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link. When this parameter is set to mute, the ODU does not transmit microwave signals but can normally receive microwave signals. When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU normally transmits and receives microwave signals. In normal cases, this parameter is set to unmute.
Transmission Status
unmute mute
unmute
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-49
Parameter ATPC Enabled
Value Range Disabled Enabled
Description
l
This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. The central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold is set as the expected receive power. It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled. This parameter specifies whether the automatic threshold function is enabled. If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link.
ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0 -35.0 to -90.0
-45.0 -70.0
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
A-50
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the XPIC tab.

Parameter Group ID Polarization direction-V Link ID-V Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the work group. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction V corresponds. This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction V corresponds. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H corresponds. This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction H corresponds.
l
Polarization direction-H Link ID-H
IF Channel Bandwidth
28M 56M
IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the channel spacing of the corresponding radio links. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-51
Parameter Power to Be Received -V(dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU exceeds the range of receive power3 dB, the ODU LED of the IF board connected to the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that the antenna is not aligned. After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU exceeds the range of receive power3 dB, the ODU LED of the IF board connected to the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that the antenna is not aligned. After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Power to Be Received -H(dBm)
A-52
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module.. This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. The transmit power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
Transmit Power (dBm)
Transmission Frequency(MHz)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-53
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and receiver. If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, this parameter is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. If this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. If this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. In normal cases, this parameter is set to unmute.
Transmission Status
unmute mute
unmute
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

Parameter Group ID Polarization direction Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the work group. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H or the polarization direction V corresponds.
A-54
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter AM Enable Status
Description
l
When this parameter is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed AM Capacity QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-55
Parameter Manually Specified Modulation Mode
Value Range QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
Default Value QPSK
Description This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
Guaranteed E1 Capacity
When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter depends on IF Channel Bandwidth and Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed AM Capacity and cannot be set. When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter depends on IF Channel Bandwidth and Manually Specified Modulation Mode and cannot be set.
E1 Capacity
1 to 75
This parameter specifies the number of E1 services that can be transmitted in Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the Guaranteed E1 Capacity. The E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
Parameters for ATPC Management

Parameter Group ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be set.
A-56
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter ATPC Enable Status
Description
l
This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to a value for the expected receive power. It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. You can set this parameter only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled.
-75.0 to -20.0 -35.0 to -90.0
-45.0 -70.0
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-57
Parameter ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Description
l
This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. If this parameter is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm).
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click Create.

Parameter WTR time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value 600 Description
l
This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter specifies whether the SD switching function of N+1 protection is enabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the SD condition is considered as a trigger condition of protection switching. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
Enabled
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
A-58
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters

Parameter Select Mapping Direction Value Range Work Unit Protection Unit
l
Default Value Work Unit
Description
l
This parameter specifies the mapping direction of N+1 protection. This parameter is set according to the planning information. In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF ports as Work Unit and map the remaining IF port as Protection Unit. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Select Mapping Way
Mapped Board
This parameter indicates the working unit and protection unit that have been set.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
Protection Group Parameters

Parameter Protection Group ID WTR Time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. It is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-59
Parameter SD Enable
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies whether the SD switching function of N +1 protection is enabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the SD condition is considered as a trigger condition of protection switching. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
Protocol Status
This parameter indicates the status of the switching control protocol.
Protection Unit Parameters

Parameter Protection Unit Line Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the protection unit. This parameter indicates the information about the working board or protection board. This parameter indicates the switching state. This parameter indicates the protected unit. This parameter indicates the local end or remote end.
Switching Status Protection Unit Remote/Local End Indication
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click Create.
A-60
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters
Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB FD SD
l
Default Value HSB
Description
l
This parameter specifies the working mode of the IF 1+1 protection. In HSB mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. In FD mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. In SD mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection. When this parameter is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode.
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-61
Parameter WTR Time(s)
Default Value 600
Description
l
This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter indicates whether the reverse switching function is enabled. When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
Enable Reverse Switching
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
Working Board Protection Board
This parameter specifies the working board of the protection group. This parameter specifies the protection board of the protection group.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
A-62
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Protection Group Parameters

Parameter Protection Group ID Working Mode Value Range HSB FD SD
l
Default Value HSB
Description This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.

l
This parameter indicates the working mode of the created IF 1+1 protection group. In HSB mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. In FD mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. In SD mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the protection group. When this parameter is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode.
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-63
Default Value 600
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter indicates or specifies whether the reverse switching function is enabled. When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. This parameter indicates the switching state on the equipment side. Unknown is displayed when the switching state on the channel side is not queried or not obtained after a query. This parameter indicates the switching state on the channel side. Unknown is displayed when the switching state on the channel side is not queried or not obtained after a query.
Enable Reverse Switching
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
Switching Status of Device
Switching Status of Channel
Active Board of Device Active Board of Channel
This parameter indicates the current working board on the equipment side. This parameter indicates the current working board on the channel side.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A-64
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameter Unit Slot Mapping Relation Working Status of Device Signal Status of Channel Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the working board and protection board. This parameter indicates the names and ports of the working board and protection board. This parameter indicates the working state on the equipment side. This parameter indicates the status of the link signal.
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-65
Parameters for Configuring the IF

Parameter Work Mode Value Range 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK 2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK 6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM
l
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. This parameter is set according to the planning information. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same.
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IFU2 board and the IFX2 board.
A-66
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Enable AM
Default Value Disable
Description
l
When this parameter is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled.
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Channel Space
7M 14M 28M 56M
7M
Channel Space indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Guaranteed Capacity Modulation
QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
QPSK
This parameter specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. This parameter is valid only when Enable AM is set to Enabled.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-67
Parameter Full Capacity Modulation
Value Range QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Full Capacity Modulation must be higher than Guaranteed E1 Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when Enable AM is set to Enabled.

Manually Specified Modulation
QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
QPSK
This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. This parameter is valid only when Enable AM is set to Disabled.
Guaranteed E1 Capacity
When Enable AM is set to Enabled, this parameter depends on Channel Space and Guaranteed E1 Capacity and is not configurable. When Enable AM is set to Disabled, this parameter depends on Channel Space and Manually Specified Modulation Mode and is not configurable.
Specified Max E1 Capacity
This parameter specifies the number of E1 services that can be transmitted in the Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the Guaranteed E1 Capacity. The E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
A-68
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Link ID
Default Value 1
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Link ID
1 to 4094
This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link.

NOTE When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.
ATPC Enable Status
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. If the APTC function is enabled, the transmit power of the transmitter automatically varies within the specified ATPC range according to the change of the RSL at the receive end. In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to a value for the expected receive power. It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0
-45.0
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-69
Parameter ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)
Value Range -35.0 to -90.0
Default Value -70.0
Description Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold (dBm) is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. If this parameter is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm).
Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with the packet radio equipment, this parameter is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter is set to Disabled.
A-70
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Configuring the ODU

Parameter TX Frequency (MHz) Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. This parameter indicates the range of the transmit frequency of the ODU. The Range of Frequency(MHz) depends on the specifications of the ODU.
Range of TX Frequency(MHz)
Actual TX Frequency(MHz) Actual RX Frequency(MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU. This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-71
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent interference between them. If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
Actual T/R Spacing(MHz) TX Power(dBm)
This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU.

l
This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. This parameter cannot take a value greater than the preset value of Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). The transmit power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system separately records the duration
TX High Threshold(dBm)
A-72
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter TX Low Threshold (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX High Threshold (dBm) and the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events. If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold (dBm) in the performance events. If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it. TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the ATPC function is enabled. If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm)in the performance events. If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is Lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold (dBm) in the performance events. If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset value
RX High Threshold(dBm)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-73
Parameter RX Low Threshold (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it.
Power to Be Received(dBm)
This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU exceeds the range of receive power3 dB, the ODU LED of the IF board connected to the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that the antenna is not aligned. After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. This parameter needs to be according to the planning.
A-74
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
Range of TX Power(dBm) Actual TX Power (dBm)
This parameter indicates the range of the transmit power of the ODU.
l
This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.
Actual RX Power (dBm) TX Status
Unmute Mute
Unmute
This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU.

l
This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. When this parameter is set to Mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. When this parameter is set to Unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to unmute.
Actual TX Status
Unmute Mute
This parameter indicates the actual transmit status of the ODU.
Equipment Information
Parameter Frequency(GHz) Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-75
Parameter Equipment Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and is irrelevant to the type of transmitted service. This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Station Type
Produce SN
This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU. This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.
Transmission Power Type
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP). A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups. A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. Click Create.
A-76
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameter Protection Type Value Range 1+1 Protection 1:N Protection
l
Default Value 1+1 Protection
Description
l
This parameter specifies the protection type of the linear MSP group. In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel fails, the service is switched from the working channel to the protection channel. In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. Normal services are transmitted on the working channels and extra services are transmitted on the protection channel. When one working channel fails, the services are switched from this working channel to the protection channel, and the extra services are interrupted. If extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels are required, select 1:N Protection. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP. In single-ended mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged. In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Switching Mode can be set to Dual-Ended Switching only.
Switching Mode
Single-Ended Switching Dual-Ended Switching
Single-Ended Switching (1+1 Protection) Dual-Ended Switching (1:N Protection)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-77
Parameter Revertive Mode
Value Range Non-Revertive Revertive
Default Value Non-Revertive (1+1 Protection) Revertive (1:N Protection)
Description
l
This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the linear MSP. When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive only. This parameter specifies the WTR time. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter indicates or specifies whether the switching at the SD alarm of the linear MSP is enabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l l
SD Enable
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
A-78
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Value Range New Protocol Restructure Protocol
Default Value New Protocol
Description
l
The new protocol is supported at the early stage, and the mainstream protocol version is used currently. The restructure protocol optimizes the new protocol and provides better measures to protect the new protocol, thus ensuring that the new protocol runs in a better manner. The new protocol is more mature, and the restructure protocol complies with the standard. It is recommended that you use the new protocol. You must ensure that the interconnected NEs run the protocols of the same type.

Parameter Select Mapping Direction Value Range West Working Unit West Protection Unit Default Value West Working Unit Description This parameter specifies the mapping direction of the linear MSP.
Select Mapping Mode
This parameter specifies the mapping board and port in the mapping direction. If the protection type is set to 1+1 Protection, only one line port can be mapped as West Working Unit. Only one line port can be mapped as West Protection Unit. The line port mapped as West Protection Unit and the line port mapped as West Working Unit should be configured for different boards if possible.
Mapped Board
This parameter indicates the preset slot mapping relations, including the mapping direction and the corresponding mapping mode.
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-79
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.

Parameter Protection Group ID Protection Type Value Range 1+1 Protection 1:N Protection
l
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.

l
This parameter indicates the protection type of the linear MSP group. In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel fails, the service is switched from the working channel to the protection channel. In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. Normal services are transmitted on the working channels and extra services are transmitted on the protection channel. When one working channel fails, the services are switched from this working channel to the protection channel, and the extra services are interrupted. If extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels are required, select 1:N Protection. This parameter indicates or specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP. In single-ended mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged. In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Switching Mode can be set to Dual-Ended Switching only.
Switching Mode
Single-Ended Switching Dual-Ended Switching
A-80
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the linear MSP. When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive only. This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter indicates or specifies whether the reverse switching function is enabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
SD Enable
Enabled Disabled
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-81
Value Range New Protocol Restructure Protocol
Default Value -
Description
l
The new protocol is supported at the early stage, and the mainstream protocol version is used currently. The restructure protocol optimizes the new protocol and provides better measures to protect the new protocol, thus ensuring that the new protocol runs in a better manner. You must ensure that the interconnected NEs run the protocols of the same type. The new protocol is more mature, and the restructure protocol complies with the standard. It is recommended that you use the new protocol.
Protocol Status
This parameter indicates the protocol status of the linear MSP.

Parameter Protection Unit Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates that which of the units, namely, the west protection unit or the west working unit, is currently in the protection status. This parameter indicates the west protection unit and the west working unit of the linear MSP. This parameter indicates the switching status of the line. This parameter indicates the working channel protected by the current protection channel. When Switching Mode is set to DualEnded Switching, the central office end that issues the switching command is displayed.
West Line
West Switching Status Protected Unit
Remote/Local End Indication
A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services. A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections. A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services. A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP services. A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely, configuring cross-connections). A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.
Navigation Path
l
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create.
Parameters
Parameter Level Value Range VC12 VC3 VC4
l
Default Value VC12
Description
l
This parameter specifies the level of the service to be created. If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12. If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-83
Parameter Direction
Value Range Bidirectional Unidirectional
Default Value Bidirectional
Description
l
When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink. When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink and the cross-connections from the service sink to the service source. In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Slot Source VC4
This parameter specifies the slot of the service source.

l
This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board. This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Sink Slot Sink VC4
This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink.

l
This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
A-84
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured service. To immediately deliver the configured SDH service to the NE, set this parameter to Yes.
Activate Immediately
Yes No
Yes
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
l
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create SNCP Service.

Parameter Service Type Value Range SNCP Default Value SNCP Description This parameter indicates that the type of the service to be created is SNCP.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-85
Parameter Direction
Value Range Bidirectional Unidirectional
Default Value Bidirectional
Description
l
When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the SNCP service source to the SNCP service sink. When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the SNCP service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the SNCP service sink to the service source. In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. This parameter specifies the level of the SCNP service to be created. If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12. If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4. This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. If multiple link-based protection schemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection, and N+1 protection, are available at the same time, the hold-off time needs to be set to a duration that is longer than the switching duration for the multiple linkbased protection schemes. If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.
Level
VC12 VC3 VC4
VC12
Hold-off Time (100ms)
0 to 100
A-86
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Default Value Non-Revertive
Description
l
This parameter specifies whether to switch the service to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. This parameter specifies the WTR time. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. It is recommended that you use the default value.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l l

l
Sink Slot
This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-87
Parameter Sink VC4
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board. This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. This parameter is set according to the planning information. After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly configure the SNCP service for the SNCP ring tangent point. In normal cases, it is recommended that you do not select this checkbox. This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured SNCP service. After the Activate Immediately checkbox is selected, you can immediately activate the created SNCP service.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
Selected Deselected
Deselected
Selected Deselected
Selected
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP services.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Rightclick the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.
A-88
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3.
Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.

Parameter Service Type Direction Level Value Range SNCP Unidirectional VC12 VC3 VC4
l
Default Value SNCP -
Description This parameter indicates that the type of the service to be created is SNCP. This parameter indicates the direction of the SNCP service.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the SNCP service. If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, the parameter value is VC12. If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, the parameter value is VC3. If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, the parameter value is VC4. This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. If multiple link-based protection schemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection, and N+1 protection, are available at the same time, the hold-off time needs to be set to a duration that is longer than the switching duration for the multiple linkbased protection schemes. If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.
0 to 100
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-89
Description
l
This parameter specifies whether to switch the service to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. If this parameter is set to "Revertive", the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. This parameter specifies the WTR time. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. It is recommended that you use the default value.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l l

l
A-90
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Sink Slot Sink VC4
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink.

l
This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board. This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. This parameter is set according to the planning information. After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly configure the SNCP service for the SNCP ring tangent point. In normal cases, it is recommended that you do not select this checkbox. This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured SNCP service. After the Activate Immediately checkbox is selected, you can immediately activate the created SNCP service.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
Selected Deselected
Deselected
Selected Deselected
Selected
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely, configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-91
Cross-Connection Parameters
l
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the level of the service. If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed. If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot Source Timeslot/ Path Sink Slot Sink Timeslot/ Path Activation Status
Yes No
This parameter indicates the slot of the service source. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service source. This parameter indicates the slot of the source sink. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service sink. This parameter indicates whether to activate the service. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.
Bound Group Number Lockout Status Trail Name Schedule No.
A-92
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Automatically Generated Cross-Connections

l
Default Value -
Description
l
Source Slot Source Timeslot/ Path Sink Slot Sink Timeslot/ Path Lockout Status Trail Name Schedule No.
This parameter indicates the slot of the service source. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service source. This parameter indicates the slot of the source sink. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service sink. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.

Parameter Service Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the service protection type of the protection group.
A-93
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Source
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the timeslots where the working service source and protection service source of the protection group are located. This parameter indicates the timeslots where the working service sink and protection service sink of the protection group are located.
l
Sink
Level
VC12 VC3 VC4
Current Status
This parameter indicates the current switching mode and switching status of the services of the protection group.
l
Revertive Mode
Revertive Non-Revertive
This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the service. This parameter determines whether to switch the service from the protection channel to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
A-94
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter indicates or specifies the duration of the hold-off time. When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. If multiple link-based protection schemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection, and N+1 protection, are available at the same time, the hold-off time needs to be set to a duration that is longer than the switching duration for the multiple linkbased protection schemes. If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.
0 to 100
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-95
Parameter Initiation Condition
Value Range TIM EXC SD UNEQ Null
Default Value Null
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the conditions that trigger the protection switching of the service. If TIM is selected, the SNCP service considers the HP_TIM or LP_TIM alarm as an automatic switching condition. If EXC is selected, the SNCP service considers the B3_EXC or BIP_EXC alarm as an automatic switching condition. If SD is selected, the SNCP service considers the B3_SD or BIP_SD alarm as an automatic switching condition. If UNEQ is selected, the SNCP service considers the HP_UNEQ or LP_UNEQ alarm as an automatic switching condition. It is recommended that you set Initiation Condition to the same condition for Working Service and Protection Service. The protection switching conditions in Initiation Condition are optional values not included in the default values, and they are set according to the planning information.
Trail Status
This parameter indicates the status of the working service and protection service of the protection group. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. This parameter indicates whether the working service or protection service is currently received by the protection group.
Service Grouping Active Channel
A.7 Clock Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks. A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source. A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet. A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality
This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality. A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control. A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function. A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration. A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source. A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock source. A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-97
Parameters
Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description
l
External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME port on the CSTA, CSHA, CSHB, or CSHC board in physical slot 1. The internal clock source is always at the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode. The clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels are determined according to the clock synchronization schemes. This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal. This parameter is set according to the external clock signal. In normal cases, the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.
External Clock Source Mode
2Mbit/s 2MHz
2Mbit/s
A-98
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Synchronous Status Byte
Value Range SA4 to SA8
Default Value SA4
Description
l
This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. This parameter needs to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. In normal cases, the external clock sources use the SA4 to transmit the SSM.
Clock Source Priority Sequence (1 is the highest)
Displays the priority sequence of clock sources. 1 indicates the highest clock source priority.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet

This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet

Parameter Affiliated Subnet Value Range 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Description
l
This parameter is used when the clock subnet needs to be created on the NMS. The NEs that trace the same clock source should be allocated with the same clock subnet ID.
A-99
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Protection Status
Value Range Start Extended SSM Protocol Start Standard SSM Protocol Stop SSM Protocol
Default Value Stop SSM Protocol
Description
l
The SSM protocol is a scheme used for synchronous management on an SDH network and indicates that the SSM is passed by the lower four bits of the S1 byte and can be exchanged between the nodes. The SSM protocol ensures that the equipment automatically selects the clock source of the highest quality and highest priority, thus preventing mutual clock tracing. After the standard SSM protocol is started, the NE first performs the protection switching on the clock source according to the clock quality level information provided by the S1 byte. If the quality level of the clock source is the same, the NE then performs the protection switching according to the clock priority table. That is, the NE selects an unlocked clock source that is of the highest quality and highest priority from all the current available clock sources as the clock source to be synchronized and traced by the local station. If the SSM protocol is stopped, it indicates that the S1 byte is not used. The NE selects and switches a clock
A-100
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description source only according to the sequence specified in the priority table. The clock source of the highest priority is used as the clock source to be traced.
l
After the SSM protocol is stopped, each NE performs the protection switching on the clock according to the preset priority table of the clock source only when the clock source of a higher priority is lost.
Clock Source
This parameter indicates the clock source that is configured for an NE. In Clock Source Priority, you can set whether to add or delete a clock source.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-101
Parameter Clock Source ID
Value Range (None) 1 to 15
Default Value (None)
Description
l
This parameter is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is started. Clock source IDs are allocated for the following clock sources only:
External clock source Internal clock source of the node that accesses the external clock sources Internal clock source of the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings Line clock source that enters the ring when the intra-ring line clock source is configured at the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality

This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Click the Clock Quality tab.
A-102
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Clock Source Quality

Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the configured clock source. In Clock Source Priority, you can set whether to add or delete a clock source. This parameter specifies the quality level that is configured for the clock source. This function is required only in a special scenario or in a test. Generally, this parameter need not be set.
Configuration Quality
Unknown Synchronization Quality G.811 Clock Signal G.812 Transit Clock Signal G.812 Local Clock Signal G.813 SDH Equipment Timing Source (SETS) Signal Do Not Use For Synchronization Automatic Extraction
Automatic Extraction
Clock Quality
This parameter indicates the clock source quality signal received by the NE. The NE extracts the clock source quality signal from the S1 byte of each clock source.
Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level

Parameter NE Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-103
Parameter Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level
Value Range Do Not Use For Synchronization G.811 Reference Clock Between G.811 Reference Clock and G.812 Transit Clock G.812 Transit Clock Between G.812 Transit Clock and G.812 Local Clock G.812 Local Clock Between G.812 Local Clock and synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) SETS Clock Between synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) and quality unavailable
Default Value Do Not Use For Synchronization
Description This parameter specifies the clock quality whose level is manually set to zero.
l
Do Not Use For Synchronization: the notification information in the reverse direction of the selected synchronization clock source to avoid direct mutual locking of adjacent NEs. G.811 Reference Clock: the clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 811. Between G.811 Reference Clock and G.812 Transit Clock: lower than the quality level of the clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 811 but higher than the quality level of the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITUT G.812. G.812 Transit Clock: the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812. Between G.812 Transit Clock and G.812 Local Clock: lower than the quality level of the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITUT G.812 but higher than the quality level of the local exchange clock signal specified in ITUT G.812. G.812 Local Clock: the local exchange clock signal specified in ITUT G.812.
A-104
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
l
Between G.812 Local Clock and synchronous equipment timing source (SETS): lower than the quality level of the local exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812 but higher than the quality level of the clock signal of the SETS. SETS Clock: the clock signal of the SETS. Between synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) and quality unavailable: lower than the quality level of the clock signal of the SETS but higher than the quality level unavailable in the synchronous timing source.
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Click the SSM Output Control tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-105
Parameters
Parameter Line Port Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the name of the line clock port. Line Port: indicates the SSM quality information output port of the current available line clock source and the external clock source. This output port can transmit the quality information of the clock source by outputting the S1 byte to the downstream NE. This parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol or the extended SSM protocol is started. This parameter indicates whether the SSM is output at the line port. When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet, set this parameter to Enabled. Otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.
Control Status
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Click the Clock ID Status tab.
A-106
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters
Parameter Line Port Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the name of the line clock port. Line Port: indicates the SSM quality information output port of the current available line clock source and the external clock source. This output port can transmit the quality information of the clock source by outputting the S1 byte to the downstream NE. This parameter is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is started. This parameter indicates whether the clock source ID is output at the line port. If the line ports are connected to the NEs in the same clock subnet and if the extended SSM protocol is started on the opposite NE, this parameter is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter is set to Disabled.
Enabled Status
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
Navigation Path
1. 2.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching. Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-107
Parameters
Parameter NE Name Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion Mode Value Range Auto-Revertive Non-Revertive Default Value Auto-Revertive Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
l
When the quality of a higher-priority clock source degrades, the NE automatically switches the clock source to a lowerpriority clock source. If this parameter is set to Auto-Revertive, the NE automatically switches the clock source to the higherpriority clock source when this higherpriority clock source restores. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE does not automatically switch the clock source to the higher-priority clock source when this higher-priority clock source restores. Correct setting of Clock Source Switching Condition ensures the reliability of the clock source switching. To improve the clock quality, select Auto-Revertive. Otherwise, to prevent jitter of the clock, generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Non-Revertive.
A-108
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Clock Source WTR Time(min.)
Value Range 0 to 12
Default Value 5
Description
l
This parameter specifies the duration from the time when the clock source restoration is detected to the time when the clock source switching is triggered. This parameter is used to avoid frequent switching of the clock source due to unstability of the clock source state within a short time. This parameter is valid only when Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion Mode is set to Auto-Revertive.
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters
Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the clock source. This parameter indicates whether the clock source is valid.
Effective Status
Valid Invalid
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-109
Parameter Lock Status
Value Range Lock Unlock
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the locking status of the clock source in the priority table. Lock: A clock source in the priority table is in the locked state. The clock source in the locked state cannot be switched. Unlock: A clock source in the priority table is in the unlocked state. The clock source in the unlocked state can be switched.
Switching Source
This parameter indicates the clock source to be traced by the NE after the switching. This parameter indicates the switching status of the current clock source.
Switching Status
Normal Manual Switching Forced Switching
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock source.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
Parameter 2M Phase-Locked Source Number Value Range External Clock Source 1 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the number of the external clock source output of the NE.
A-110
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter External Clock Output Mode
Value Range 2Mbit/s 2MHz
Default Value 2Mbit/s
Description
l
This parameter specifies the mode of the output clock. This parameter needs to be set according to the requirements of the interconnected equipment. Generally, the output external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/ s signal. This parameter is valid only when External Clock Output Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the output clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. If this parameter is set to ALL, it indicates that all the bits of the TS0 are used to transmit the SSM. It is recommended that you use the default value.
External Clock Output Timeslot
SA4 to SA8 ALL
ALL
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-111
Parameter External Source Output Threshold
Value Range Threshold Disabled Not Inferior to G.813 SETS Signal Not Inferior to G.812 Local Signal Not Inferior to G.812 Transit Clock Signal Not Inferior to G.811 Clock Signal
Default Value Threshold Disabled
Description
l
This parameter specifies the lowest quality of the output clock. If the clock quality is lower than the value of this parameter, it indicates that the external clock source does not output any clock signal. If this parameter is set to Threshold Disabled, it indicates that the external clock source always outputs the clock signal. It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter specifies the failure condition of the 2 Mbit/ s phase-locked clock source. It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter is valid only when 2M PhaseLocked Source Fail Condition is not set to No Failure Condition. This parameter specifies the operation of the 2 Mbit/s phaselocked loop (PLL) when the 2 Mbit/s phase-locked clock source meets the failure conditions. It is recommended that you use the default value.
2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition
No Failure Condition AIS LOF AIS OR LOF
No Failure Condition
2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Action
Shut Down Output 2M Output S1 Byte Unavailable Send AIS
Shut Down Output
A-112
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Synchronization Status.
Parameters
Parameter NE Name NE Clock Working Mode S1 Byte Synchronization Quality Information Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the working mode of the NE clock. This parameter indicates the synchronization quality information of the S1 byte. This parameter indicates the clock synchronization source of the S1 byte. This parameter indicates the synchronization source.
S1 Byte Synchronous Source Synchronous Source
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-113
Parameter Data Output Method in Holdover Mode
Value Range Normal Data Output Mode Keep the Latest Data
Default Value Normal Data Output Mode
Description
l
When all the reference timing signals are lost, the slave clock changes to the holdover mode. At this time, the slave clock works based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost. Then, the frequency of the oscillator drifts slowly to ensure that the offset between the frequency of the slave clock and the reference frequency is very small. As a result, the impact caused by the drift is limited within the specified requirement. Normal Data Output Mode: The slave clock works based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost, and the holdover duration depends on the size of the phaselocked clock register on the equipment. The holdover duration can be up to 24 hours. Keep the Latest Data: The slave clock works in holdover mode all the time based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost.
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line) service. A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services. A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items. A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service. A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services. A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line) service.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Click New.

Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service.
l
Service Name
Direction
UNI-UNI UNI-NNI NNI-NNI
UNI-UNI
This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-115
Parameter BPDU
Value Range Not Transparently Transmitted Transparently Transmitted
Default Value Not Transparently Transmitted
Description
l
This parameter specifies the transparent transmission ID of the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. It is used to indicate whether the E-Line service transparently transmits the BPDU packets. If the BPDU packets are used as the service packets and transparently transmitted to the opposite end, set this parameter to Transparently Transmitted. In other cases, set this parameter to Not Transparently Transmitted. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
MTU(byte)
The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.
Service Tag Role
A-116
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Source Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI. Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-117
Parameter Source VLANs
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI. The number of VLANs must be the same value of Sink VLANs. Otherwise, you need to create a VLAN forwarding table for swapping VLAN IDs. If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source. Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-NNI.
Bearer Type
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
A-118
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter QinQ Link ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
Selects the QinQ link ID. A QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-NNI. Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to NNI-NNI. Selects the QinQ link ID of the first QinQ link. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to NNI-NNI. The QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link. Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to NNI-NNI. Selects the QinQ link ID of the second QinQ link. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to NNI-NNI. The QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link.
Bearer Type 1
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
QinQ Link ID 1
Bearer Type 2
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
QinQ Link ID 2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-119
Parameter Sink Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of Source Port. The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. The number of VLANs must be the same value of Source VLANs. If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the sink port are used as the service sink. If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the sink port can be used as the service sink.
Sink VLANs
1 to 4094
A-120
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.

Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the E-Line service. This parameter indicates the source node. This parameter indicates the sink node. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.
Service Name
Source Node Sink Node Service Tag Role
MTU(byte)
1518 to 9600
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-121
Parameter BPDU
Value Range Not Transparently Transmitted Transparently Transmitted
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. This parameter is used to indicate whether the Ethernet line transparently transmits the BPDU packets. If the BPDU packets are used as the service packets and transparently transmitted to the opposite end, set this parameter to Transparently Transmitted. If the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network, set this parameter to Not Transparently Transmitted.
Active
Active Inactive
This parameter indicates whether E-Line service is active.
Parameters Associated with UNI Ports

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the UNI port.
A-122
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter VLANs
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port.
l
This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. If this parameter is set to null, all the services of the UNI work as the service source or service sink. If this parameter is not set to null, only the services of the UNI port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source or service sink.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-123
Parameters Associated with NNI Ports

Parameter QinQ Link ID Value Range 1 to 4294967295 Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the QinQ link ID of the QinQ link connected to the NNI port. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. This parameter indicates the NNI port. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the NNI port. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-NNI or NNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. This parameter is preset in QinQ Link.
Port
S-VLAN ID
Parameters for the Port Attributes

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the QinQ link ID of the QinQ link connected to the port.
A-124
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Enable Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates whether to enable the port. This parameter is preset in General Attributes of Ethernet Interface. This parameter indicates the encapsulation type of the port. This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. If this parameter is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard. This parameter is preset in General Attributes of Ethernet Interface. This parameter indicates the tag of the port. This parameter is preset in Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interface .
Encapsulation Type
Null 802.1Q QinQ
TAG
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-125
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab. Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item

Parameter Source Interface Type Value Range V-UNI Default Value V-UNI Description This parameter specifies the network attribute of the source interface. This parameter specifies the source interface. This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the source service. This parameter specifies the network attribute of the sink interface. This parameter specifies the sink interface. This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the sink service.
Source Interface Source VLAN ID
1 to 4094
Sink Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
Sink Interface Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094
NOTE
The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface. The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely. In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of VLAN IDs.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click New.

Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description
l
This parameter specifies the ID of the E-LAN service. The OptiX RTN 910 supports simultaneous creation of an E-LAN service only.
Service Name
This parameter specifies the name of the E-LAN service.

l
BPDU
This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the BPDU packets. In the case of an ELAN service, this parameter supports only transparent transmission of the BPDU packets and cannot be set manually. Not Transparently Transmitted indicates that the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-127
Parameter Tag Type
Value Range C-Awared S-Awared Tag-Transparent
Default Value C-Awared
Description
l
C-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on the client-side). To create the 802.1q bridge, set this parameter to CAwared. S-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at the carrier service layer). To create the 802.1ad bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. Tag-Transparent indicates that only the Ethernet packets that do not contain VLAN tags are accessed. To create the 802.1d bridge, set this parameter to TagTransparent. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-128
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Self-Learning MAC Address
Description
l
This parameter specifies whether to enable the MAC address self-learning function. If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is enabled, the Ethernet LAN learns an MAC address according to the original MAC address in the packet and automatically refreshes the MAC address forwarding table. If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is disabled, a static MAC address forwarding table needs to be configured. Otherwise, the Ethernet LAN fails to forward the services. This parameter indicates the mode used to learn an MAC address. When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. If the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table.
MAC Address Learning Mode
MTU(byte)
Service Tag Role
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-129
Parameters for UNIs

Parameter Port SVLAN Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the UNI port.
l
This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. If this parameter is set to null, all the services of the UNI work as the service source or service sink. If this parameter is not set to null, only the services of the UNI port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source or service sink.
VLANs/CVLAN
1 to 4094
A-130
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters of NNIs
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the NNI port. This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the NNI port. This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Parameter Split Horizon Group ID Value Range Default Value 1 Description
l
This parameter indicates the ID of the split horizon group. The default split horizon group ID is 1 and cannot be set manually.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-131
Parameter Split Horizon Group Member
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
A split horizon group member indicates the logical port member in the split horizon group. The port members that are added to the same split horizon group cannot communicate with each other. The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the division of the split horizon group members according to the Ethernet physical port. If a UNI or NNI logical port of the 802.1ad bridge is added to a split horizon group member, the physical port that is mounted with the logical port is automatically added to the split horizon group member.
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the ID of the E-LAN service. The supports simultaneous creation of an E-LAN service only.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-132
Parameter Service Name
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter specifies the name of the E-LAN service.

l
BPDU
This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the BPDU packets. In the case of an ELAN service, this parameter supports only transparent transmission of the BPDU packets and cannot be set manually. Not Transparently Transmitted indicates that the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-133
Parameter Tag Type
Value Range C-Awared S-Awared Tag-Transparent
Default Value C-Awared
Description
l
C-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on the client-side). To create the 802.1q bridge, set this parameter to CAwared. S-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at the carrier service layer). To create the 802.1ad bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. Tag-Transparent indicates that only the Ethernet packets that do not contain VLAN tags are accessed. To create the 802.1d bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. This parameter indicates whether to enable the MAC address self-learning function. If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is enabled, the Ethernet LAN learns an MAC address according to the original MAC address in the packet and automatically refreshes the MAC address forwarding table.
Self-Learning MAC Address
Enabled
Enabled
A-134
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter MAC Address Learning Mode
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the mode used to learn an MAC address. When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. If the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table.
MTU(byte)
Service Tag Role
Parameters for UNIs

Parameter Port SVLAN Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the UNI port.
l
This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-135
Parameter VLANs/CVLAN
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. If this parameter is set to null, the E-LAN service exclusively uses the corresponding UNI physical port. That is, the entire port is mounted to the bridge. If this parameter is set to a non-null value, only the corresponding UNI port whose service packets contain this VLAN ID works as the logical port and is mounted to the bridge.
Parameters for NNIs

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the NNI port. This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.
A-136
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter SVLANs
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Parameters for Static MAC Addresses

Parameter VLAN ID Value Range Default Value 1 Description
l
This parameter is invalid if MAC Address Learning Mode is SVL. That is, the preset static MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. If MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL, the preset static MAC address entries are valid for only the VLANs whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-137
Parameter MAC Address
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the static MAC address. A static MAC address is an address that is set manually. It is not aged automatically and needs to be deleted manually. Generally, a static MAC address is used for the port that receives but does not forward Ethernet service packets or the port whose MAC address need not be aged automatically. This parameter specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Egress Interface
A-138
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address

Parameter VLAN ID Value Range Default Value 1 Description
l
This parameter is invalid if MAC Address Learning Mode is SVL. That is, the preset self-learning MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. If MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL, the preset selflearning MAC address entries are valid for only the VLANs whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter indicates or specifies the self-learning MAC address. A selflearning MAC address is also called a dynamic MAC address. A self-learning MAC address is an entry obtained by a bridge in SVL or IVL learning mode. A self-learning MAC address can be aged. This parameter specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
MAC Address
Egress Interface
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-139
Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning

Parameter Aging Ability Value Range Enabled Disabled Aging Time(min) 5 Default Value Enabled Description The OptiX RTN 910 supports enabling/ disabling of the aging function and aging time for the MAC address table. If one routing entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this routing entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. The aging time of a MAC address table is 5 minutes by default.
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses

Parameter VLAN ID Value Range Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the service. A disabled MAC address is valid for the VLAN whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID.
A-140
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter MAC Address
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies or indicates the disabled MAC address. A disabled MAC address is also called a blacklisted MAC address. This parameter is used for discarding an entry, also called a black hole entry, whose data frame that contains a specific destination MAC address. A disabled MAC address needs to be set manually and cannot be aged.
Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing

Parameter Frame Type Value Range Unicast Multicast Handing Mode Discard Broadcast Broadcast Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the type of the received unknown frame. Selects the method of processing the unknown frame. If this parameter is set to Discard, the unknown frame is directly discarded. If this parameter is set to Broadcast, the unknown frame is broadcast at the forwarding port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-141
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Parameter Split Horizon Group ID Value Range Default Value 1 Description
l
This parameter indicates the ID of the split horizon group. The default split horizon group ID is 1 and cannot be set manually. A split horizon group member indicates the logical port member in the split horizon group. The port members that are added to different split horizon groups cannot communicate with each other. The supports only the division of the split horizon group members according to the Ethernet physical port. If a UNI or NNI logical port of the 802.1ad bridge is added to a split horizon group member, the physical port that is mounted with the logical port is automatically added to the split horizon group member.
Split Horizon Group Member
Maintenance Association Parameters

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created maintenance association.
A-142
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Maintenance Association Name
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance association, which is a domain related to a service. Through maintenance association division, the connectivity check (CC) can be performed on the network that transmits a service instance. This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes. This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting packets in the CC test. The CC is performed to check the availability of the service.
CC Test Transmit Period
1s 10s 1m 10m
1s
Parameters for the MEP

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Node VLAN MP ID Value Range 1 to 2048 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created MEP. This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP. This parameter indicates the MEP node. This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the current service.
l l
This parameter specifies the MEP ID. Each MEP needs to be configured with an MEP ID, which is unique in the maintenance association. The MEP ID is required in the OAM operation. This parameter specifies the direction of the MEP. "Ingress" indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted to the port, and "Egress" indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted from the port. This parameter specifies whether to enable the CC function of the MEP. In the case of the tests based on the MP IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
Direction
Ingress Egress
Ingress
CC Status
Active Inactive
Active
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-143
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree. Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes

Parameter QinQ Link ID Value Range 1 to 4294967295 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 910 supports 1024 QinQ links, whose IDs must be different from each other.
Board
This parameter specifies the board where the QinQ link is located. This parameter specifies the port where the QinQ link is located.
l
Port
S-Vlan ID
1 to 4094
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID (at the network operator side) for the QinQ link. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol. A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks. A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) management. A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups. A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges. A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST. A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP CIST. A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol. A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted. A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route management. A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports. A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the IGMP Snooping protocol. A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups. A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP Snooping protocol. A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG). A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG. A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management. A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-145
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management. Click New.
Parameters
Parameter ERPS ID Value Range 1 to 8 Default Value Description
l
This parameter specifies the ID of the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) instance. The IDs of ERPS instances on an NE must be different from each other.
East Port
This parameter specifies the east port of the ERPS instance. This parameter specifies the west port of the ERPS instance.
l
West Port
RPLOwner Ring Node Flag
Yes No
No
This parameter specifies whether the node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner. Only one node on the ring can be set as the RPL owner for each Ethernet ring. This parameter specifies the RPL port. There is only one RPL port and this RPL port must be the east or west port on the RPL owner node.
RPL Port
A-146
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Control VLAN
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets or inband DCN packets. The Control VLAN must be set to the same value for all the NEs on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node
01-19-A7-00-00-01
01-19-A7-00-00-01
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) management.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-147
Parameters
Parameter ERPS ID Value Range 1 to 8 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the ERPS instance. This parameter indicates the east port of the ERPS instance. This parameter indicates the west port of the ERPS instance. This parameter indicates whether a node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner. This parameter indicates the RPL port.
l
East Port
West Port
RPL Owner Ring Node Flag
Yes No
RPL Port Control VLAN
1 to 4094
This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets or inband DCN packets. The Control VLAN must be set to the same value for all the NEs on an ERPS ring.
A-148
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Destination Node
Value Range 01-19-A7-00-00-01
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
l
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0 to 10000, in step of 100
This parameter indicates or specifies the hold-off time of the ERPS hold-off timer. The hold-off timer is used for negotiating the protection switching sequence when the ERPS coexists with other protection schemes so that the fault can be rectified in the case of other protection switching (such as LAG protection) before the ERPS occurs. When a node on the ring detects one or more new faults, it starts up the hold-off timer if the preset holdoff time is set to a value that is not 0. During the hold-off time, the fault is not reported to trigger an ERPS. When the hold-off timer times out, the node checks the link status regardless whether the fault that triggers the startup of the timer exists. If the fault exists, the node reports it to trigger an ERPS. This fault can be the same as or different from the fault that triggers the initial startup of the hold-off timer.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-149
Parameter Guard Time(ms)
Value Range 10 to 2000, in step of 10
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the guard time of the ERPS guard timer. The nodes on the ring continuously forward the R-APS packets to the Ethernet ring. As a result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist on the ring network. After a node on the ring receives the outdated R-APS packets, an incorrect ERPS may occur. The ERPS guard timer is an R-APS timer used for preventing a node on the ring from receiving outdated RAPS packets. When a faulty node on the ring detects that the switching condition is cleared, the node starts up the guard timer and starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets. During this period, the R-APS packets received by the node are discarded. The received R-APS packets are forwarded only after the time of the guard timer expires.
A-150
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter WTR Time(min)
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time of the WRT timer in the case of ERPS protection. The WTR time refers to the duration from the time when the working channel is restored to the time when the switching is released. When the working channel is restored, the WTR timer of the RPL owner starts up. In addition, a signal that indicates the operation of the WTR timer is continuously output in the timing process. When the WTR timer times out and no switching request of a higher priority is received, the signal indicating the operation of the WTR timer is not transmitted. In addition, the WTR release signal is continuously output. The WTR timer is used to prevent frequent switching caused by the unstable working channel.
Packet Transmit Interval(s)
1 to 10
This parameter displays or specifies the interval for sending R-APS packets periodically. This parameter indicates or specifies the level of the maintenance entity. This parameter indicates the last switching request.
Entity Level
0 to 7
Last Switching Request
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-151
Parameter RB Status
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the RB status of the packets received by the working node.
l
noRB: The RPL is not blocked. RB (RPL Blocked): The RPL is blocked.
DNF Status
This parameter indicates the DNF status of the packets received by the working node.
l
noDNF: The R-APS packets do not contain the DNF flag. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on a non-RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is requested to clear the forwarding address table. DNF: The R-APS packets contain the DNF flags. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on an RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is informed not to clear the forwarding address table.
A-152
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Status of State Machine
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the status of the state machine at the working node.
l
Idle: The Ethernet ring is in normal state. For example, no node on the Ethernet ring detects any faults or receive the R_APS (NR, RB) packets. Protection: The Ethernet ring is in protected state. For example, a fault on the node triggers the ERPS, or a node on the ring is in the WTR period after the fault is rectified.
Node Carried with Current Packet
This parameter indicates the MAC address carried in the R-APS packets received by the current node. The MAC address refers to the MAC address of the source node that initiates the switching request.
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Port Group Parameters tab. Click Create. The Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-153

Parameter Protocol Type Value Range MSTP STP Default Value MSTP Description This parameter specifies the protocol type.
l
MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 910 supports the CIST MSTP only. STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol. This parameter specifies whether to enable the protocol of the port group or a member port in the port group. If the STP or MSTP is enabled, the spanning tree topology is automatically reconfigured. As a result, the services are interrupted.
Enable Protocol
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
Parameters for Application Ports

Parameter Board Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the board where the member of port group is located. This parameter indicates the available port list in which a port can be added to the port group. This parameter indicates the selected ports that can be added to the port group.
Available Port List
Selected Port List
A-154
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Port Group Parameters tab. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured. Click Config. The Configure Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port

Parameter Board Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the board where the member of port group is located. This parameter indicates the available port list in which a port needs to be added to the port group. This parameter indicates the selected ports that need to be added to the port group.
Available Port List
Selected Port List
A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-155

Parameter Port Group ID Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the ID of the port group. This parameter can be set to only the port group ID that is automatically allocated.
MST Domain Name
The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.
Redaction Level
Mapping List
Bridge Parameters
Parameter Port Group ID Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the ID of the port group. This parameter can be set to only the port Group ID that is automatically allocated.
A-156
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Network Diameter
Value Range 2 to 7
Default Value 7
Description
l
This parameter specifies the MSTP network diameter. Network Diameter is related to the link whose number of switches is the most and is indicated by the number of switches that are connected to the link. When you set Network Diameter for the switches, the MSTP automatically sets Max Age(s), Hello Time(s), and Forward Delay(s) to the more appropriate values for the switches. If the value of Network Diameter is greater, the network is in a larger scale. This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge. The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.
Hello Time(s)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-157
Parameter Max Age(s)
Value Range 6 to 40
Default Value 20
Description
l
This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced. This parameter specifies the holdoff time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
Port Parameters
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port in the port group.
A-158
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Enable Edge Attribute
Description
l
This parameter specifies the management edge attributes of the port. This parameter specifies whether to set the port as an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected to the LAN. In normal cases, this port does not receive or transmit BPDU messages. This parameter can be set to Enabled only when the port is directly connected to the data communications terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Actual Edge Attribute
This parameter indicates the actual management edge attributes of the port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-159
Parameter Point-to-Point Attribute
Value Range false true auto
Default Value auto
Description
l
This parameter specifies the point-topoint attribute of the port. false: forced nonpoint-to-point link attribute true: forced point-topoint link attribute auto: automatically detected point-to-point link attribute If this parameter is set to auto, the bridge determines Actual Point-to-Point Attribute of the port according to the actual working mode. If the actual working mode is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute is true. If the actual working mode is halfduplex, Actual Pointto-Point Attribute is false. Only the designated port whose Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is "True" can transmit the rapid state migration request and response. It is recommended that you use the default value.
Actual Point-to-Point Attribute
This parameter indicates the actual point-to-point attribute of the port.
A-160
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Max Transmit Packet Count
Default Value 3
Description
l
This parameter specifies the maximum number of packets to be transmitted. The maximum number of packets to be transmitted by the port refers to the maximum number of MSTP packets that the port can transmit within 1s. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.

Parameter Port Group MSTI ID Value Range 0 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies the port group. This parameter indicates the MSTI ID. The value 0 indicates common and internal spanning tree (CIST). TheOptiX RTN 910 supports only the MSTP that uses CIST.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-161
Parameter Bridge Priority
Default Value 32768
Description
l
The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicates the priority of the bridge. When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
Port Parameters
Parameter Port Priority Value Range 0 to 240, in step of 16 Default Value 128 Description This parameter indicates the port in the port group.
l
The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
200000
A-162
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the CIST Running Information tab.

Parameter Port Group ID Protocol Running Mode Value Range MSTP STP
l
Description This parameter indicates the ID of the port group.

l
This parameter indicates the running mode of the protocol. MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the CIST-based MSTP. STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-163
Parameter Bridge Priority
Default Value 32768
Description
l
This parameter indicates the priority of the bridge. The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicates the priority of the bridge. When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the bridge. This parameter indicates the MAC address of the root bridge. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.
Root Bridge MAC Address External Path Cost ERPC Domain Root Bridge Priority Domain Root Bridge MAC Address Internal Path Cost IRPC
A-164
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Root Port Priority
Default Value 128
Description
l
This parameter indicates the priority of the root port. The most significant eight bits of the ID of the root port indicate the priority of the root port. When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.
Root Port Hello Time(s)
This parameter indicates the root port.

l
This parameter indicates the interval for transmitting CBPDU packets through the bridge. The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases. This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-165
Parameter Forward Delay(s)
Value Range 4 to 30
Default Value 15
Description
l
This parameter specifies the holdoff time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
MST Domain Max Hop Count Topology Change Count
The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. This parameter indicates the identifier of the topology change. This parameter indicates the duration of the last topology change. This parameter indicates the count of the topology changes.
Last Topology Change Time(s) Topology Change Count
Port Parameters
Parameter Port Enable Protocol Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the port in the port group. This parameter indicates whether the protocol of the port group or a member of the port group is enabled. This parameter indicates the role of a port.
Port Role
A-166
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Port Status
Value Range Discarding Learning Forwarding
Default Value Discarding
Description This parameter indicates the state of a port.

l
Discarding: receives only BPDU packets Learning: only receives or transmits BPDU packets Forwarding: forwards user traffic, and transmits/receives BPDU packets The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value. The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicates the priority of the bridge. When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
200000
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-167
Parameter Bridge MAC Address
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the MAC address of the bridge.

l
Designated Port Priority
128
The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.
Design Port Edge Port Attribute
Disabled Enabled
Enabled
This parameter indicates the designated port.

l
This parameter specifies the management edge attributes of the port. This parameter specifies whether to set the port as an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected to the LAN. In normal cases, this port does not receive or transmit BPDU messages. This parameter can be set to Enabled only when the port is directly connected to the data communications terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Actual Edge Port Attribute
This parameter indicates the actual management edge attributes of the port.
A-168
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Point to Point
Value Range false true auto
Default Value auto
Description
l
This parameter specifies the point-topoint attribute of the port. false: forced nonpoint-to-point link attribute true: forced point-topoint link attribute auto: automatically detected point-to-point link attribute If this parameter is set to auto, the bridge determines Actual Point to Point Attribute of the port according to the actual working mode. If the actual working mode is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute is true. If the actual working mode is halfduplex, Actual Point to Point Attribute is false. Only the designated port whose Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is "True" can transmit the rapid state migration request and response. It is recommended that you use the default value.
Actual Point to Point
This parameter indicates the actual point-to-point attribute of the port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-169
Parameter Max Count of Transmitting Message
Default Value 3
Description
l
This parameter indicates the maximum number of packets to be transmitted. The maximum number of packets to be transmitted by the port refers to the maximum number of MSTP packets that the port can transmit within 1s. This parameter indicates the running mode of the protocol. MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the CIST-based MSTP. STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol. This parameter indicates the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge. The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.
Protocol Running Mode
STP MSTP
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
A-170
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Max Age(s)
Value Range 6 to 40
Default Value 20
Description
l
This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced. This parameter specifies the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
Remain Hop
The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
2.
Click the Protocol Configuration tab.

Parameter Service ID Enabled Protocol Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the service ID.
l
This parameter specifies whether to enable the IGMP Snooping protocol. If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMP Snooping protocol according to the requirement. If an entry is not updated in a certain period (that is, no IGMP query packet is received), this entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. If this parameter is set to a very large value, the bridge stores excessive multicast entries that are outdated. Consequently, the resources of the multicast table are exhausted. If this parameter is set to a very small value, the bridge may delete the multicast entry that is required. Consequently, the forwarding efficiency decreases.
Router Port Aging Time (min)
1 to 120
A-172
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Maximum Times of No Response from Multicast Members
Value Range 1 to 4
Default Value 3
Description
l
This parameter specifies the maximum number of multicast group members who do not respond. If the IEEE 802.1q bridge transmits an IGMP group query packet to the multicast member ports, the IEEE 802.1q bridge starts the timer for the query of the maximum number of responses. If no IGMP report packets are received within the query time, the IEEE 802.1q bridge adds one to the number of no responses at the port. When the number of no responses exceeds the preset value of Maximum Times of No Response from Multicast Members, the IEEE 802.1q bridge deletes the additional multicast members from the multicast group. This parameter specifies the maximum number of allowable multicast groups. The multicast group records the mapping relations between the ports on the router, MAC multicast addresses, and member ports in the multicast group.
Maximum Number of Multicast Groups
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-173
Parameter Maximum Number of Multicast Group Members
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the maximum number of allowable multicast group members. A multicast group member refers to the host that is added to a multicast group.
Actual Multicast Count
This parameter indicates the number of actually used multicast groups. This parameter indicates the number of actually used multicast group members.
Actual Multicast Members Count
A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Protocol Configuration tab. Click Add.
Parameters for Fast Leave Ports

Parameter Service ID VLAN ID Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the service ID.
l
This parameter specifies the VLAN where the port to be quickly deleted is located. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
A-174
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Port Type
Value Range V-UNI V-NNI
Default Value V-UNI
Description
l
This parameter specifies the type of the port to be quickly deleted. This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
Port
This parameter specifies the port to be quickly deleted.
A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route management.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Router Port Management tab.
Parameters for Router Port Management

Parameter Service ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the created ELAN service. This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the router port. This parameter indicates the type of the router port. This parameter indicates the router port. This parameter indicates the status of the router port. This parameter indicates the time when the router port is created.
A-175
VLAN ID
1 to 4094
Port Type Port Port Status
Port Creating Time
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Port Remainder Aging Time(min)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the remaining aging time of the router port.
A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Router Port Management tab. Click New.
Parameters for Router Port Creation

Parameter Service ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the created ELAN service. This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the router port. This parameter indicates the available ports. This parameter indicates the specified router port.
VLAN ID
1 to 4094
Available Port Selected Port
A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the IGMP Snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
1. 2.
A-176
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.
Parameters for Multicast Groups Information

Parameter Service ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the created ELAN service. This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the multicast group. This parameter indicates the multicast MAC address. This parameter indicates the type of the multicast group. This parameter indicates the time when the multicast group is set up.
VLAN ID
1 to 4094
Multicast MAC Address
Multicast Groups Type
Multicast Group Creating Time
Parameters for Multicast Group Members Information

Parameter Service ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the created ELAN service. This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the multicast group member. This parameter indicates the type of the multicast group member. This parameter indicates the multicast group member port. This parameter indicates the remaining nonresponse times of the multicast group member port.
VLAN ID
1 to 4094
Port Type
Port
Port Remainder Aging Times
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-177
A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Route Member Port Management tab. Click New.
Parameters for Router Port Creation

Parameter Service ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the created ELAN service. This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the multicast group. This parameter specifies the multicast MAC address. This parameter indicates the available interfaces. This parameter indicates the preset port of the multicast group members.
VLAN ID
1 to 4094
Multicast MAC Address
Available Port Selected Port
A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics

This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP Snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Packet Statistics tab.
A-178
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Routing Member Interface Management

Parameter Service ID VLAN ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the service ID. This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the service. This parameter indicates the port type. This parameter indicates the port. This parameter indicates or specifies the status of collecting the packet statistics. This parameter indicates the number of received IGMPv1 query packets. This parameter indicates the number of received IGMPv2 query packets. This parameter indicates the number of received IGMPv3 query packets. This parameter displays the number of leaving packets that are received. This parameter indicates the number of received packets that are reported by the IGMPv1 members. This parameter indicates the number of received packets that are reported by the IGMPv2 members. This parameter indicates the number of received packets that are reported by the IGMPv3 members. This parameter indicates the number of packets that cannot be recognized or processed.
A-179
Port Type Port Packet Statistics Status
Clear Start Stop
Clear
IGMPv1 Query Packet Count IGMPv2 Query Packet Count IGMPv3 Query Packet Count IGMP Leaving Packet Count IGMPv1 Member Report Packet Count
IGMPv2 Member Report Packet Count
IGMPv3 Member Report Packet Count
Unrecognized or Unprocessed Packet Count
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Discarded Incorrect Packet Count
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the number of discarded error packets.
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. Click New.

Parameter LAG No. Value Range 1 to 16 Default Value 1 Description
l
This parameter specifies the LAG number to be set manually. This parameter is valid only when Automatically Assign is not selected. This parameter indicates whether LAG No. is allocated automatically. When Automatically Assign is selected, LAG No. cannot be set.
Automatically Assign
Selected Deselected
Selected
LAG Name
This parameter specifies the LAG name.
A-180
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter LAG Type
Value Range Static Manual
Default Value Static
Description
l
Static: You can create a LAG. When you add or delete a member port to or from the LAG, the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) protocol is required. In a LAG, a port can be in the Selected or Standby state. The aggregation information is exchanged among different equipment through the LACP protocol to ensure that the aggregation information is the same among all the nodes. Manual: You can manually create a LAG. When you add or delete a member port, the LACP protocol is not required. The port can be in the up or down state. According to the physical up or down state, the port determines whether to perform an aggregation.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-181
Value Range Revertive Non-Revertive
Description
l
This parameter can be set only when Load Sharing is set to NonSharing. When a LAG is set to Revertive, the services are switched back to the former working channel after this channel is restored to normal. When a LAG is set to Non-Revertive, the status of the LAG does not change after the former working channel is restored to normal. That is, the services are still transmitted on the protection channel. Sharing: Each member link of a LAG processes traffic at the same time and shares the traffic load. The sharing mode can increase a bandwidth utilization for the link. When the LAG members change, or certain links fail, the system automatically re-allocates the traffic. Non-Sharing: Only one member link of a LAG carries traffic, and the other link is in the standby state. In this case, a hot backup mechanism is provided. When the active link of a LAG is faulty, the system activates the standby link, thus preventing link failure.
Load Sharing
Sharing Non-Sharing
Non-Sharing
A-182
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Load Sharing Hash Algorithm
Value Range Source MAC Destination MAC Source and Destination MAC Source IP Destination IP Source and Destination IP
Default Value Source MAC
Description
l
This parameter is valid only when Load Sharing of a LAG is set to Sharing. The load sharing computation methods include: MAC address specific allocation (based on the source MAC address, destination MAC address, and XOR between source MAC address and source MAC address), IP address specific allocation (based on the source IP address, destination IP address, and XOR between source IP address and source IP address).
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-183
Parameter System Priority
Default Value 32768
Description
l
This parameter indicates the priority of a LAG. The smaller the value of System Priority, the higher the priority. When a local LAG negotiates with an opposite LAG through LACP packets, both LAGs can obtain the system priorities of each other. Then, the LAG of the higher system priority is considered as the comparison result of both LAGs so that the aggregation information is consistent at both LAGs. If the priorities of both LAGs are the same, the system MAC addresses are compared. Then, the comparison result based on the LAG with smaller system MAC address is considered as the result of both LAGs and is used to ensure that the aggregation information is consistent at both LAGs.
Port Settings Parameters

Parameter Main Board Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter specifies the main board in a LAG. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-184
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Main Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the main port in a LAG. After a LAG is created, you can add Ethernet services to the main port only. Services cannot be added to a slave port. When Load Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link connected to the main port is used to transmit the services, and the link connected to the slave port is used for protection. This parameter specifies the slave board in a LAG. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the salve port in a LAG. The slave ports in a LAG are fixed. Unless they are manually modified, the system does not automatically add them to or delete them from the LAG.
Board (Available Slave Ports)
Port (Available Slave Ports)
Selected Slave Ports
This parameter indicates the selected slave ports.
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
2.
Click the Port Priority tab.

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port whose priority can be set.
l
Port Priority
0 to 65535
32768
This parameter indicates the priorities of the ports in a LAG as defined in the LACP protocol. The smaller the value, the higher the priority. When ports are added into a LAG, the port of the highest priority is preferred for service transmission.
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management from the Function Tree. Click New.
Parameters for Convergence Points

Parameter Board Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the board at the convergence point. This parameter specifies the port on the board of the convergence point.
NOTE One port can be in an LPT only.
A-186
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Access Points

Parameter Board Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the board at the access point. This parameter specifies the port on the board of the access point.
NOTE The access point supports selection of multiple ports on different boards.
A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree. Click New. The Port Mirror Management dialog box is displayed.

Parameter Mirror Name Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter specifies the name of the mirroring task. After the mirroring function of the port is enabled, you can monitor all the mirrored ports by analyzing the packets at the mirroring port only. As a result, you can easily manage the ports. This parameter specifies the direction in which the service to be monitored. Ingress indicates that the Listened Port copies the received packets to the Mirror Listener Port and sends the packets out of the Mirror Listener Port. Egress indicates that the Listened Port copies the transmitted packets to the Mirror Listener Port and sends the packets out of the Mirror Listener Port. This parameter specifies the mirroring listener port and the listened port.
Direction
Ingress Egress
Ingress
Mirror Listener Port
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-187
Parameter Listened Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l l
Listened Port indicates the source port of the mirrored packets. Mirror Listener Port indicates the port from which the packets copied from the Listened Port are sent out. Mirror Listener Port: The port where services are available cannot be selected. Otherwise, the creation fails.
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (OAM). A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains. A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations. A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end point (MEP). A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP. A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP). A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB. A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT. A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports. A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance domain. The maintenance domain refers to the network for the Ethernet OAM. This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes. This parameter specifies the level of the maintenance domain. The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level, the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level, and the values 5-7 indicates the user level. When the value is set to 0, the maintenance domain is at the lowest level. The values 1-7 indicate that the level increases in a sequential order. The OAM packets whose level is higher than the preset value are transparently transmitted by the MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is lower than the preset value are directly discarded by the MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is the same as the preset value are responded to or terminated by the MEPs according to the message type.
Maintenance Domain Level
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path
1. 2.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose New > New Maintenance Association.

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created maintenance association.
l
This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance association, which is a domain related to a service. Through maintenance association division, the connectivity check (CC) can be performed on the network that transmits a service instance. This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes.
Relevant Service
This parameter specifies the service instance that is related to the maintenance association.
l
CC Test Transmit Period
1s 10s 1 min 10 min
1s
This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting packets in the CC. The CC is performed to check the availability of the service.
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end point (MEP).
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New MEP Point.
A-190
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Board Port VLAN MP ID Value Range 1 to 2048 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created MEP. This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP. This parameter specifies the board where the MEP is located. This parameter specifies the port where the MEP is located. This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the current service.
l l
This parameter specifies the MEP ID. Each MEP needs to be configured with an MEP ID, which is unique in the maintenance association. The MEP ID is required in the OAM operation. This parameter specifies the direction of the MEP. Ingress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted to the port, and Egress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted from the port. This parameter specifies whether to enable the CC function of the MEP. In the case of the tests based on the MP IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
Direction
Ingress Egress
Ingress
CC Status
Active Inactive
Active
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point dialog box is displayed. Click New.

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Remote Maintenance Point ID(_e.g:1,3-6) Value Range 1 to 2048 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the MEP. This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP.
l
This parameter specifies the ID of the remote MEP. If other MEPs may initiate OAM operations to an MEP in the same MA, set the other MEPs to be the remote MEPs.
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the MIP Point tab. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.

Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Board Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the MIP. This parameter specifies the board where the MIP is located. This parameter specifies the port where the MIP is located.
A-192
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter MP ID
Default Value 1
Description
l l
This parameter specifies the MIP ID. Each MIP needs to be configured with an MIP ID, which is unique in the maintenance domain. The MIP ID is required in the OAM operation.
NOTE To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a port, ensure that only one MIP can be created and the level of the MIP must be higher than the level of the MEP.
A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test. Choose OAM > Start LB.

Parameter MP ID Value Range Selected Deselected Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Source Maintenance Point ID Selected Deselected Selected Default Value Deselected Description This parameter needs to be selected if the LB test is performed on the basis of MP IDs. This parameter needs to be selected if the LB test is performed on the basis of MAC addresses. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance domain for the LB test. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance association for the LB test.
l
This parameter specifies the source maintenance point in the LB test. Only the MEP can be set to the source maintenance point.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-193
Parameter Destination Maintenance Point ID
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the destination maintenance point in the LB test. Only the MEP can be set to the destination maintenance point. Destination Maintenance Point ID can be set only when MP ID is selected. This parameter specifies the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LB test. Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the destination maintenance point. Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address can be set only when Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address. This parameter specifies the number of packets transmitted each time in the LB test. When the value is greater, the required duration is longer. This parameter specifies the length of a transmitted LBM packet. If the packet length is different, the test result may be different. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter specifies the priority of transmitting packets. 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7 indicates the highest priority. In normal cases, this parameter is set to the highest priority.
Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address
00-00-00-00-00-00
Transmitted Packet Count
1 to 255
Transmitted Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
Transmitted Packet Priority
0 to 7
Detection Result
This parameter indicates the relevant information and result of the LB test.
A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
A-194
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test. Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters

Parameter MP ID Value Range Selected Deselected Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Source Maintenance Point ID Selected Deselected Selected Default Value Deselected Description This parameter needs to be selected if the LT test is performed on the basis of MP IDs. This parameter needs to be selected if the LT test is performed on the basis of MAC addresses. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance domain for the LT test. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance association for the LT test.
l
This parameter specifies the source maintenance point in the LT test. Only the MEP can be set to the source maintenance point. This parameter specifies the destination maintenance point in the LT test. Only the MEP can be set to the destination maintenance point. Destination Maintenance Point ID can be set only when MP ID is selected. This parameter specifies the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LT test. Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the destination maintenance point. Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address can be set only when Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Destination Maintenance Point ID
Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address
00-00-00-00-00-00
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-195
Parameters for the Detection Result

Parameter Source Maintenance Point ID Destination Maintenance Point ID/MAC Response Maintenance Point ID/MAC Hop Count Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the source maintenance point in the LT test. This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LT test. This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the responding maintenance point is located in the LT test.
l
1 to 64
This parameter indicates the number of hops from the source maintenance point to the responding maintenance point or to the destination maintenance point in the LT test. The number of hops indicates the adjacent relation between the responding maintenance point to the source maintenance point. The number of hops increases by one when a responding point occurs on the link from the source maintenance point to the destination maintenance point.
Test Result
This parameter indicates the result of the LT test.
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter

This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Parameter tab.

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-196
Parameter Enable OAM Protocol
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the OAM protocol. After the OAM protocol is enabled, the current Ethernet port starts to use the preset mode to create the OAM connection with the opposite end. This parameter indicates or specifies the working mode of the OAM. The port whose OAM working mode is set to Active can initiate the OAM connection. The port whose OAM working mode is set to Passive can only wait for the opposite end to send the OAM connection request. The OAM working mode of the equipment at only one end can be Passive. This parameter indicates or specifies whether the local link events can be notified to the opposite end. If the alarms caused by link events can be reported, that is, if the number of performance events (for example, error frame period, error frame, error frame second, and error frame signal cycle) at the local end exceeds the preset threshold, these performance events are notified to the port at the opposite end through the link event notification function. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
OAM Working Mode
Active Passive
Active
Link Event Notification
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-197
Parameter Remote Side Loopback Response
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies whether the port responds to the remote loopback. Remote loopback indicates that the local OAM entity transmits packets to the remote OAM entity for loopback. The local OAM entity can locate the fault and test the link performance through loopback data analysis. If a port does not support remote loopback response, this port does not respond to the loopback request from the remote port regardless of the OAM port status.
Loopback Status
Non-Loopback Initiate Loopback at Local Respond Loopback of Remote
This parameter indicates the loopback status at the local end.

NOTE Loopback Status is valid only after you choose OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
OAM Discovery Status
FAULT ACTIVE_SEND_L OCAL PASSIVE_WAIT SEND_LOCAL_R EMOTE SEND_LOCAL_R EMOTE_OK SEND_ANY
This parameter indicates the OAM discovery status at the local end.
Port Transmit Status
FWD DISCARD
This parameter indicates the status of transmitting packets at the local end. When a port is in the FWD state, the port forwards the non-OAM packets. When a port is in the DISCARD state, the port discards the non-OAM packets. This parameter indicates the status of receiving packets at the local end. In the FWD state, the port forwards the non-OAM packets. In the LB state, the port loopback the non-OAM packets. In the DISCARD state, the port discards the non-OAM packets.
Port Receive Status
FWD DISCARD LB
A-198
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.

Parameter Port Error Frame Monitor Window (ms) Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frame) Value Range 1000 to 60000, in step of 100 1 to 4294967295, in step of 1 Default Value 1000 Description This parameter indicates the corresponding port. This parameter specifies the duration of monitoring error frames.
l
This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring error frames. Within the specified value of Error Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Monitor Threshold(frame), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame Period Window (frame) Error Frame Period Threshold (frame)
1488 to 892800000, in step of 1 1 to 892800000, in step of 1
892800000
This parameter specifies the window of monitoring the error frame period.
l
This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring the error frame period. Within the specified value of Error Frame Period Window(frame), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Period Threshold(frame), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame Second Window(s)
60
This parameter specifies the time window of monitoring the error frame second.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-199
Parameter Error Frame Second Threshold (s)
Default Value 1
Description
l
This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring error frame seconds. If any error frame occurs in one second, this second is called an errored frame second. Within the specified value of Error Frame Second Window(s), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Second Threshold(s), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window (Entries) Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Threshold (Entries)
This parameter specifies the window of monitoring the error frame signal period.
1 to 7500000000, in step of 1
This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring the error frame signal period. Within the specified value of Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window(Entries), if the number of error signals exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Threshold(Entries), an alarm is reported.
A.11 QoS Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS. A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains. A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains. A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied ports. A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies. A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies. A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification. A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.

Parameter Mapping Relation ID Value Range 1 to 8 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the ID of the mapping relation between DiffServ domains. This parameter indicates the name of the mapping relation between DiffServ domains.
Mapping Relation Name
Default Map
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The default Diffserv domain cannot be modified and deleted.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

Parameter CVLAN Value Range 0 to 7 Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the priority of the C-VLAN of the ingress packets. C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. This parameter indicates the priority of the S-VLAN of the ingress packets. S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
SVLAN
0 to 7
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-201
Parameter IP DSCP
Value Range 0 to 63
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
A-202
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter PHB
Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the per-hop behavior (PHB) service class of the DiffServ domain. The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DiffServ node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, and DSCP value) contained in the packets of the DiffServ domain and the eight PDB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-203
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation

Parameter PHB Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7
l
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DiffServ domain. The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DiffServ node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, and DSCP value) contained in the packets of the DiffServ domain and the eight PDB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
CVLAN
0 to 7
This parameter indicates the priority of the C-VLAN of the egress packets. C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
A-204
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter SVLAN
Value Range 0 to 7
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the priority of the S-VLAN of the egress packets. S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. This parameter indicates the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. The DSCP refers to bits 0-5 of the DS field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
IP DSCP
0 to 63

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port that uses the DiffServ domain. The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 910 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN and IP DSCP packets that contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, or DSCP value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for besteffort forwarding.
NOTE The E-Line point-to-point transparent transmission service supports only the mapping from DSCP packets to the PHB service class.
Packet Type
CVLAN SVLAN IP-DSCP
CVLAN
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-205
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. Click Create.

Parameter Mapping Relation ID Value Range 2 to 8 Default Value 2 Description This parameter specifies the ID of the mapping relation of a DS domain. This parameter specifies the name of the mapping relation of a DS domain.
l
Mapping Relation Name
Packet Type
cvlan svlan ip-dscp
cvlan
This parameter specifies the type of the packet. The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 910 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN and IP DSCP packets that contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, or DSCP value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for best-effort forwarding.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The default DS domain cannot be modified and deleted.
A-206
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

Parameter CVLAN Value Range 0 to 7 Default Value Description
l
This parameter specifies the C-VLAN priority of the ingress packets. C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. This parameter specifies the S-VLAN priority of the ingress packets. S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. This parameter specifies the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
SVLAN
0 to 7
IP DSCP
0 to 63
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-207
Parameter PHB
Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DS domain. The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, and DSCP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PDB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
A-208
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation

Parameter PHB Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7
l
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DS domain. The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, and DSCP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PDB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
CVLAN
0 to 7
This parameter specifies the C-VLAN priority of the egress packets. C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-209
Parameter SVLAN
Value Range 0 to 7
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the S-VLAN priority of the egress packets. S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. This parameter specifies the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the egress packets. The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
IP DSCP
0 to 63

Parameter Board Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the board that uses the mapping relations between DS domains. This parameter displays the available port list from which you can select the port that uses the mapping relations between DS domains. This parameter displays the selected port list. The ports in the list use the mapping relations between DS domains.
Available Port
Selected Port
A-210
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface. Click the Apply Port tab. Click Modify.
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports

Parameter Mapping Relation Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the mapping relation of a DS domain.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-211
Parameter Packet Type
Value Range CVLAN SVLAN IP-DSCP
Default Value CVLAN
Description
l
This parameter specifies the type of the packet. The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 910 are the C-VLAN, S-VLAN and IP-DSCP packets that contain the CVLAN priority, SVLAN priority, or DSCP value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for best-effort forwarding. When the OptiX RTN 910 receives services and identifies service types based on VLAN priorities, the trusted packets at a UNI ports carry C-VLAN priorities, and the trusted packets at an NNI port carry SVLAN priorities. When the OptiX RTN 910 receives services and identifies service types based on DSCP values, the trusted packets at a port carry IP-DSCP values.
Board
This parameter specifies the board where the port is located. This parameter indicates the available port.
Available Port
A-212
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Selected Port
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the selected port. The selected port is applied to the DS domain.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The port applied to the default DS domain cannot be modified.
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Policy ID Value Range 1 to 36 Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the policy ID of the port. The OptiX RTN 910 supports a maximum number of 36 policies.
Policy Name
This parameter indicates or specifies the policy name of the port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-213
Parameter CoS
Value Range CS7 CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE
Default Value -
Description
l
The BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7 service classes respectively map eight queuing entities. The OptiX RTN 910 provides different QoS policies for the queues at different service classes. CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
A-214
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Grooming Police After Reloading
Value Range SP WRR
Default Value CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: WRR
Description
l
The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of congestion events. The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output subqueues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each subqueue has a certain period of service time. The OptiX RTN 910 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE).
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-215
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
l
This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the weight of the policy in the WRR queue. The weight indicates the percentage of the bandwidth resources obtained by the WRR queue. This parameter can be set only when Grooming Police After Reloading is set to WRR. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding to a PHB service class. CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Policy Weight(%)
1 to 100
25
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
CIR(kbit/s)
Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid.
A-216
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter PIR(kbit/s)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. This parameter is set according to the planning information. It is recommended that you set the value of the CBS equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PBS is valid. This parameter is set according to the planning information. When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CBS(byte)
PBS(byte)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-217
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree. Click the CoS Queue Configuration tab. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters
Parameter Policy ID Value Range 1 to 36 Default Value Description
l
This parameter specifies the policy ID of the port. The OptiX RTN 910 supports a maximum number of 36 policies.
Automatically Assign
Selected Deselected
Deselected
This parameter specifies whether to automatically allocate the policy ID of the port policy. After this parameter is selected, the system automatically allocates the policy ID, and then the policy ID cannot be set manually. This parameter specifies the policy name of the port.
Policy Name
A-218
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter CoS
Default Value -
Description
l
The BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7 service classes respectively map eight queuing entities. The OptiX RTN 910 provides different QoS policies for the queues at different service class. CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-219
Parameter Grooming Police After Reloading
Value Range SP WRR
Default Value CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: WRR
Description
l
The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of congestion events. The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output subqueues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each subqueue has a certain period of service time. The OptiX RTN 910 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE).
A-220
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
l
This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the weight of the policy in the WRR queue. The weight indicates the percentage of the bandwidth resources obtained by the WRR queue. This parameter can be set only when Grooming Police After Reloading is set to WRR. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding to a PHB service class. CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Policy Weight(%)
1 to 100
25
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
CIR(kbit/s)
Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-221
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. This parameter is set according to the planning information. It is recommended that you set the value of the CBS equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PBS is valid. This parameter is set according to the planning information. When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CBS(byte)
PBS(byte)
A-222
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab. Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.

Parameter Traffic Classification ID Value Range 1 to 1024 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the traffic classification.
l
ACL Action
Permit Deny
Permit
The access control list (ACL) determines whether to forward or discard the packets that enter the port according to the specified matching rules. When this parameter is set to Permit, the ACL on the ingress side filters the packets that enter the port. Only the packets that match the specified rules can be received by the port. When this parameter is set to Deny, ACL processing is not performed for the packets over the ingress port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-223
Ingress Parameters
Parameter Logical Relation Between Matched Rules Value Range And Default Value And Description
l
This parameter specifies the logical relationship between the traffic classification matching rules. The OptiX RTN 910 supports the setting of the logical AND between multiple matching rules. After you click Add or Delete, complex traffic classification can be performed on the traffic that enters the ingress port according to the preset matching rules. In the case a specific service, complex traffic classification can be divided into basic traffic types according to the DSCP value, C_VLAN ID, C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN ID, or S_VLAN priority. Traffic type is based on the associated Ethernet packets. Therefore, this parameter is set according to the packet type and the planning information. If the matching value of the packets is the same as the preset Match Value, the packets match the rules of complex traffic classification. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Match Type
DSCP Value CVlan ID CVlan priority SVlan ID SVlan priority
Match Value
DSCP Value: 0 to 63 CVlan ID: 1 to 4094 CVlan priority: 0 to 7 SVlan ID: 1 to 4094 SVlan priority: 0 to 7
A-224
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter CoS
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the PHB service class queue mapped by the traffic classification packets. If this parameter is set to empty (-), the traffic classification packets map the PHB service class queue according the mapping relation specified in the topic about Diffserv domain management. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter indicates or specifies whether the CAR operation is performed for the flow in the ingress direction. CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled Enabled
Enabled
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-225
Parameter CIR(kbit/s)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, the packets are marked blue and pass the CAR policing. These packets are first forwarded in the case of network congestion. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. The processing method of the packets marked yellow can be set to "Pass" or "Remark". "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port. If a network congestion event occurs again, the packets marked yellow can be processed according to the new priority. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-226
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, the packets that exceed the rate restriction are marked red and directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. The processing method of the packets marked yellow can be set to "Pass" or "Remark". "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port. If a network congestion event occurs again, the packets marked yellow can be processed according to the new priority. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-227
Parameter CBS(byte)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
During a certain period, if the rate of the packets whose processing method is marked "Pass" is not more than the CIR, certain burst packets are allowed and can be first forwarded in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. This parameter is set according to the planning information. During a certain period, if the rate of the packets whose processing method is marked "Pass" is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, certain burst packets are allowed and marked yellow. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the CAR operation performed by the equipment on the packets. The packets are dyed according to the result of the CAR operation. The dying rule is determined by the comparison between the rate of the packets and the preset CAR value. The OptiX RTN 910 supports Color Blindness only.
PBS(byte)
Coloration Mode
Color Blindness
Color Blindness
A-228
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Packet Color
Value Range Red Yellow Green
Default Value -
Description Packets can be dyed in three colors: red, yellow, and green. The packets in red are first discarded.
l
Handling Mode
Discard Pass Remark
This parameter specifies the method of handling the packets. Discard: The packets are discarded. Pass: The packets are forwarded. Remark: The packets are remarked. "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port.
Relabeled CoS
CS7 CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE
If the handling method is set to "Remark", you can reset the CoS of the packets.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-229
Egress Parameters
Parameter Bandwidth Limit Value Range Disabled Enable Default Value Enable Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies whether the traffic shaping is performed in the egress function. CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. This parameter is set according to the planning information. In the case that no packets exist in the egress queue: When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets directly enter the egress queue. In the case that certain packets exist in the egress queue: The packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CIR(kbit/s)
A-230
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
In the case that no packets exist in the egress queue: If the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. If the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, the packets are directly discarded. In the case that certain packets exist in the egress queue: The packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. This parameter is set according to the planning information. If the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR during a certain period, the burst packets are directly transmitted. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CBS(byte)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-231
Parameter PBS(byte)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
If the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR during a certain period, the burst packets enter the egress queue. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree. Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management

Parameter Slot No. Port CIR (kbit/s) CBS (byte) PIR (kbit/s) Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the slot ID. This parameter specifies the port. Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid. If the traffic shaping function is enabled, OptiX RTN 910 processes the packets in the buffer queue through the
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-232
Parameter PBS (byte)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description following methods when no packets are available in the queue. l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR.
A.12 RMON Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances. A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups. A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups. A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups. A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter Object Sampling Period Display Accumulated Value Value Range 5 to 150 Selected Deselected
l
Default Value 5 Deselected
Description This parameter specifies the object to be monitored. This parameter specifies the duration of the monitoring period.
l
This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events. If this parameter is not selected, the displayed value is an increment compared to the value that is collected in last sampling period and stored in the register. If this parameter is selected, the displayed value is an absolute value that is currently stored in the register. This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events. If this parameter is set to Graphics, the number of performance events to be monitored at each time cannot be more than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Display Mode
Graphics List
List
A-234
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Legend
Value Range Color Description
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the description of different colors. This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to Graphics. This parameter indicates the queried performance events. This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to List.
Event
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Click the History Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter Object Ended History Table Type Value Range 30-Second 30-Minute Custom Period 1 Custom Period 2 Display Mode Graphics List
l
Default Value 30-Second
Description The parameter indicates the object to be monitored. This parameter specifies the start time and end time of the monitoring period. This parameter specifies the monitoring period.
List
This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events. If this parameter is set to Graphics, the number of performance events to be monitored at each time cannot be more than 10, and the unit should be the same. This parameter indicates the description of different colors. This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Legend
Color Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-235
Parameter Event
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the queried performance events. This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to List.
Statistical Item Statistical Value Time Flag
This parameter indicates the performance items to be monitored. This parameter indicates the statistical value of the monitored performance items. This parameter indicates the time point of each performance event.
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History Control Group.
Parameters
Parameter 30-Second Value Range Enabled Disabled 30-Minute Enabled Disabled Custom Period 1 Enabled Disabled Custom Period 2 Enabled Disabled History Register Count(1-50) Period Length(300 to 43200 seconds, a multiple of 30) 1 to 50 16 6(Custom Period 2) 300 to 43200 900 Disabled Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Second monitoring function. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable Custom Period 1. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable Custom Period 2. This parameter indicates or specifies the quantity of the history registers.
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the monitoring period in Custom Period 1. The value must be an integer multiple of 30.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-236
Parameter Period Length(300 to 86400 seconds, a multiple of 30)
Default Value 86400
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the monitoring period in Custom Period 2. The value must be an integer multiple of 30.
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Parameter Object 30-Second Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be collected. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Second monitoring function.
NOTE In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function. In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 1. In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.
Custom Period 1
Enabled Disabled
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-237
Parameter Custom Period 2
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 2. In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.
Event Parameters
Parameter Event 30-Second Value Range Enabled Disabled 30-Minute Enabled Disabled Custom Period 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the performance event to be monitored. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on 30-Second. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 1Custom Period 1 Monitor. This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 2Custom Period 2 Monitor.
l
Custom Period 2
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
Threshold Detect
Report All Do Not Detect Report Only the Upper Threshold Report Only the Lower Threshold
Report All
This parameter indicates or specifies the threshold detection method. If the number of detected events reaches the preset threshold, the events are reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the events are not reported to the NMS. If an event does not support this parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Upper Threshold
This parameter indicates or specifies the upper threshold. If the number of performance events exceeds the preset upper threshold, the corresponding performance events are reported.
A-238
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Lower Threshold
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates or specifies the lower threshold. If the number of performance events is less than the preset lower threshold, the corresponding performance events are reported. This parameter indicates the unit of each threshold of the performance events.
Threshold Unit
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces. A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features. A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features. A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports. A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports. A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General

This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the General tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-239
Parameters
Parameter Call Waiting Time (s) Value Range 1 to 9 Default Value 9 Description
l
This parameter indicates the waiting time after the local station dials the number. If the calling station does not receive the response message from the called station within the call waiting time, it automatically removes the communication connection. If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to five seconds. If more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to nine seconds. The call waiting time should be set to the same for all the NEs.
Dialling Mode
Pulse Dual-Tone Frequency
Dual-Tone Frequency
This parameter indicates the dialling mode of the orderwire phone.
Conference Call
888
This parameter indicates the telephone number of the network-wide orderwire conference call. When a OptiX RTN 910 dials the telephone number 888, the orderwire phones of all the NEs on the orderwire subnet ring. When a OptiX RTN 910 receives the call, the orderwire phones on the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the orderwire point-to-multipoint group call changes to a point-to-point call between two NEs. The telephone number of the orderwire conference call should be the same for all the nodes on the same subnet. The telephone number of the orderwire conference call must have the same length as the telephone number of the orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local site.
A-240
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Phone 1
Default Value 101
Description
l
This parameter specifies the orderwire phone number of the local station. An addressing call refers to a point-to-point call. The length of the orderwire phone number of each NE should be the same. It is recommended that you set the phone number to a three-digit number. The orderwire phone number of each NE should be unique. It is recommended that the phone numbers are allocated from 101 for the NEs in a sequential order according to the NE IDs. The orderwire phone number cannot be set to the group call number 888 and cannot start with 888.
Available Orderwire Port Selected Orderwire Port
This parameter indicates the available port for the orderwire phone. This parameter indicates the selected port for the orderwire phone.
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones

Parameter Orderwire Occupied Bytes Value Range E1 E2
l
Default Value E1
Description
l
This parameter specifies the overhead byte that is used to transmit the orderwire signals. Regardless the parameter value, the radio link always uses a customized overhead byte to transmit the orderwire signals. Hence, this parameter should be set according to the occupied SDH overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-241
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port

This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Parameter Available Data Channel Value Range Default Value Description
l
This parameter indicates the available F1 data channel. Two data channels should be selected for the configuration.
No. Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2
This parameter indicates the number of the F1 data port.

l
If an SDH optical or electrical line port is selected, this parameter corresponds to the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line port. If an IF port is selected, this parameter corresponds to the customized F1 byte in the microwave frame at the IF port. If F1 is selected, this parameter corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the SCC, Cross-Connect and Clock Board. The F1/S1 interface complies with ITUT G.703 and operates at the rate of 64 kbit/s.
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port

This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.
A-242
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports

Parameter Overhead Byte Value Range SERIAL1 to SERIAL4 Default Value SERIAL1 Description
l
In the case of an SDH optical/electrical line, the preset overhead byte is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. In the case of a radio link, a customized serial overhead byte in the microwave frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. When this parameter is set to the SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the corresponding SCC, Cross-Connect and Clock Board is used. When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the value of Overhead Byte of this port is used. When this parameter is set to the IF port, the customized Serial byte in the microwave frame of this port is used.
Broadcast Data Source
No Data
Available Broadcast Data Sink Selected Broadcast Data Sink
This parameter indicates the available broadcast data sink.

l
When this parameter is set to the SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the corresponding SCC, Cross-Connect and Clock Board is used. When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the value of Overhead Byte of this port is used. When this parameter is set to the IF port, the customized Serial byte in the microwave frame of this port is used.
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface

This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path
Select the AUX logical board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-243
Parameters for the Basic Attributes

Parameter Operation Object Relay Control Mode Value Range Auto Control Manual Control Default Value Auto Control Description This parameter indicates the operation object.
l
Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the alarming relay is started up automatically. Otherwise, the alarming relay is shut down. Manual Control: Relay Status in Major Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in Critical Alarm(K1) need to be set. This parameter indicates that the status of the relay is set manually for major alarms. Enable: The relay is set to the "0N" status for major alarms. Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF" status for major alarms. This parameter is valid only when Relay Control Mode is set to Manual Control. This parameter indicates that the status of the relay is set manually for critical alarms. Enable: The relay is set to the enabled status for critical alarms. Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled status for critical alarms. This parameter is valid only when Relay Control Mode is set to Manual Control.
Relay Status in Major Alarm(K0)
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Relay Status in Critical Alarm(K1)
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Parameters for the Input Relay

Parameter Operation Object Path Name Using Status Value Range Unused Used Default Value Unused Description This parameter indicates the operation object. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the channel. This parameter specifies whether the alarm interface of the input relay is used.
A-244
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Alarm Mode
Value Range Relay Turns Off/ High Level Relay Turns On/ Low Level
Default Value Relay Turns Off/ High Level
Description
l
If this parameter is set to Relay Turns Off/High Level, an alarm is generated when the relay is turned off. If this parameter is set to Relay Turns On/Low Level, an alarm is generated when the relay is turned on. This parameter is valid only when Using Status is set to Used.
Alarm Severity
Critical Alarm Major Alarm Minor Alarm Warning Alarm
Critical Alarm
This parameter specifies the severity of the alarm that is generated at the input relay.
Parameters for the Output Relay

Parameter Operation Object Output Path Name Use or Not Value Range Unused Used Default Value Unused Description This parameter indicates the operation object. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the output channel. This parameter specifies whether the alarm interface of the output relay is used.
Parameters for the Temperature Attributes

Parameter Operation Object Temperature Upper Threshold (Deg.C) Temperature Lower Threshold (Deg.C) Value Range -40.0 to 80.0 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the operation object. This parameter specifies the upper temperature threshold of the board. When the actual temperature is higher than the preset value, an alarm is generated. This parameter specifies the lower temperature threshold of the board. When the actual temperature is lower than the preset value, an alarm is generated.
-40.0 to 80.0
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-245
Parameters for the Alarm Relay

Parameter Alarm Severity Value Range Critical Alarm Major Alarm Minor Alarm Warning Alarm Alarm Output Channel CSK-1 CSK-2 CSK-3 CSK-4 Default Value Critical Alarm Major Alarm Minor Alarm Warning Alarm CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of the output alarm relay. Description This parameter indicates the severity of the alarm.
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces. A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes. A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes. A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function. A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records. A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test. A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU. A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the ODU. A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of the ODU. A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the ODU. A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces. A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces. A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface. A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control. A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes. A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes. A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave interfaces. A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave interfaces. A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave interfaces.
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Port Radio Link ID Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.
A-247
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Received Radio Link ID
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the IF interface. Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. Inloop indicates that the IF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. Outloop indicates that the received SDH signals are looped back. Generally, this parameter is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to NonLoopback. This parameter indicates or specifies whether the radio link transmits the wayside E1 service. The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode. This parameter indicates or specifies the slot in which the 2M wayside service is accessed. This parameter can be set only when 2M Wayside Enable Status is set to Enabled. The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.
IF Port Loopback
Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop
Non-Loopback
2M Wayside Enable Statusa
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
2M Wayside Input Boarda
A-248
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status
Value Range Stop Start
Default Value Stop
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the status of transmitting the 350 MHz carrier signals at the IF interface. This parameter can be set to Start in the commissioning process only. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the services are interrupted. This parameter indicates or specifies whether the XPIC function of the IFX2 board is enabled. If the IFX2 board does not perform the XPIC function, this parameter should be set to Disabled. In this case, the XPIC cable is required to perform self-loop for the XPIC port on the IFX2 board.
XPIC Enabledb
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslotc
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with the packet radio equipment, this parameter should be set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter should be set to Disabled.
NOTE
l l l
a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support the 2M wayside service. b. The IFU2 and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function. c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-249
Parameter ATPC Enable Status
Description
l
This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to a value for the expected receive power. It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold (dBm) is set to Disabled.
-75.0 to -20.0 -35.0 to -90.0
-45.0 -70.0
A-250
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Description
l
This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. If this parameter is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm). This parameter indicates that the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds. This parameter is valid only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled.
ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm)
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select a Hybrid IF board from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Port IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range 7M 14M 28M 56M Default Value 7M Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port. IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-251
Parameter AM Enable Status
Value Range Disable Enable
Default Value Disable
Description
l
When this parameter is set to Disable, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. When this parameter is set to Enable, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed AM Capacity QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enable. Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enable. Manually Specified Modulation Mode QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
QPSK
This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disable.
Parameter Guaranteed E1 Capacity
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
When AM Enable Status is set to Enable, this parameter depends on IF Channel Bandwidth and Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed AM Capacity and is not configurable. When AM Enable Status is set to Disable, this parameter depends on IF Channel Bandwidth and Manually Specified Modulation Mode and is not configurable.
E1 Capacity
This parameter specifies the number of E1 services that can be transmitted in the Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the Guaranteed E1 Capacity. The E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Port Event NO. Adjustment Time Adjustment Direction Switchover Transmitted Power(dBm)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the port for the ATPC adjustment. This parameter indicates the number of the ATPC adjustment event. This parameter indicates the time of the ATPC adjustment. This parameter indicates the direction of the adjustment at the port. This parameter indicates the switching operation at the port. This parameter indicates the transmitted power of the port to be switched.
A-253
Parameter Received Power (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the received power of the port to be switched.
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Port Direction Value Range Cross Tributary
l
Default Value Cross
Description This parameter indicates the port for the PRBS test.
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the direction of the PRBS test. In the tributary direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the connectivity of the cable from the tributary board to the DDF. In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the processing of the service from the tributary board to the NE at the remote end.
Duration Measured Time
1 to 255 s 10min h
1 s
This parameter indicates or specifies the duration of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates or specifies the time unit used for the PRBS test.
Start Time Progress Total PRBS
This parameter indicates the start time of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates the progress percentage of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates the number of bit errors that occur in the PRBS test.
A-254
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Accumulating Mode
Value Range Selected Deselected
Default Value Deselected
Description This parameter specifies whether to display the values in accumulative mode. If Accumulating Mode is selected, it indicates that the values are displayed in accumulative mode.
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Board Transmit Frequency(MHz) Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU.
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the central frequency of the channel. The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the minimum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the maximum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. The difference between the transmit frequencies at both ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-255
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference of the transmitter and receiver. If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, this parameter is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
Actual Transmit Frequency(MHz) Actual Receive Frequency(MHz) Actual T/R Spacing(MHz) The Range of frequency Point (MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU. This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU. This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU. This parameter indicates the working range of the frequency of the ODU.
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Power Attributes tab.
A-256
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters
Parameter Board Maximum Transmit Power (dBm) Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU.
l
This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module.. This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. This parameter is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU or a value that exceeds Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). The transmit power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Transmit Power (dBm)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-257
Parameter Power to Be Received(dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU exceeds the range of receive power3 dB, the ODU LED of the IF board connected to the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that the antenna is not aligned. After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. This parameter is set according to the planning information. If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system separately records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX High Threshold (dBm) and the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events. If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold (dBm) in the performance events. If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it.
TX High Threshold(dBm)
A-258
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter TX Low Threshold (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the ATPC function is enabled.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-259
Parameter RX High Threshold(dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm)in the performance events. If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is Lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold (dBm) in the performance events. If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it. This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.
Actual Transmit Power(dBm)
Actual Received Power(dBm) Actual range of Power(dBm)
This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU. This parameter indicates the range of the actual transmit power of the ODU.
Equip Information
Parameter Frequency(GHz) Equip Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates.
l
This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and is irrelevant to the type of transmitted service.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-260
Parameter Station Type
Value Range Tx Low Tx High
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Produce SN
This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU. This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.
Transmission Power Type
Standard Power Output High Power Output
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of the ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Equipment Information tab.
Parameters
Parameter Board Frequency(GHz) Equipment Type Value Range PDH SDH
l
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU. This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates.
l
This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and is irrelevant to the type of transmitted service.
T/R Spacing(MHz)
This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of the ODU.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-261
Parameter Intermediate Frequency Bandwidth (MHz) Station Type
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description This parameter indicates the IF frequency bandwidth of the ODU.

l
This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Transmission Power Type Produce Time Produce SN
This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU. This parameter indicates the manufacturing time of the ODU. This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU.
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Board Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU.
A-262
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter RF Loopback
Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop
Default Value Non-Loopback
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the RF interface of the ODU. Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. Inloop indicates that the RF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. This function is used for fault locating for the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. If this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. If this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. In normal cases, this parameter is set to unmute.
Configure Transmission Status
unmute mute
unmute
Actual Transmission Status Factory Information
unmute mute -
This parameter indicates the actual transmit status of the ODU. This parameter indicates the manufacturer information about the ODU.
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-263
Parameters
Parameter Port Optical Interface Namea Laser Switcha Value Range Open Close
l
Default Value Open
Description This parameter indicates the corresponding SDH interface. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the optical interface.
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the on/off state of the laser. This parameter is set for SDH optical interfaces only. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Open. This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status on the SDH interface. Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. Inloop indicates that the SDH signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. Outloop indicates that the received SDH signals are looped back. This function is used for fault locating for the SDH interfaces. The Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopbacka
Non-Loopback
A-264
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter VC4 Loopbackb
Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status in the VC-4 path. Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. Outloop indicates that the received VC-4 signals are looped back. This function is used for fault locating for the VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
NOTE
l l
a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box. b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Optical Interface Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding optical interface.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-265
Parameter Automatic Shutdown
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies whether the Automatic Laser Shutdown function is enabled or disabled for the laser. The ALS function allows the laser to shut down automatically when an optical port does not carry services, an optical fiber is broken, or no optical signal is received. You can set On Period(ms), Off Period (ms), and Continuously On-test Period (ms) only when this parameter is set to Enabled.
On Period(ms)
1000 to 3000
2000
This parameter indicates or specifies the period when a shutdown laser automatically starts up and tests whether the optical fiber is normal. This parameter indicates or specifies the period when the laser does not work (with the ALS function being enabled). This parameter indicates or specifies the period when a shutdown laser is manually started up and tests whether the optical fiber is normal.
Off Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
60000
Continuously Ontest Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
90000
A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Board/Port(Channel). Select Port from the list box.
l l
Parameters
Parameter Port Port Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding port. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the port.
A-266
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Tributary Loopback
Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status in the associated path of the tributary unit. Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. Inloop indicates that the PDH signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. Outloop indicates that the received PDH signals are looped back. This function is used for fault locating for the paths of the tributary unit. The Tributary Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Port Impedance Service Load Indication
Load Non-Loaded
Load
This parameter indicates the impedance of a path, which depends on the tributary unit.
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the service loading status in a specific path. When this parameter is set to Load, the board detects whether alarms exist in the path. When this parameter is set to NonLoaded, the board does not detect whether there are alarms in the path. If a path does not carry any services, you can set this parameter to Non-Loaded for the path to mask all the alarms. If a path carries services, you need to set this parameter to Load for the path.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-267
Parameter Retiming Mode
Value Range Normal Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock
Default Value Normal
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies the retiming mode of a specific path. By using the retiming function, the retiming reference signal from the SDH network and the service data signal are combined and then sent to the client equipment, thus decreasing the output jitter in the signal. In this way, the retiming function ensures that the service code flow can normally transfer the retiming reference signal. When this parameter is set to Normal, the retiming function is not used. When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the upstream tributary unit traced. When this parameter is set to the retiming function is used with the clock of the upstream tributary unit traced., the retiming function is used with the clock of the cross-connect unit traced. It is recommended that the external clock, instead of the retiming function, should be used to provide reference clock signals for the equipment. If the retiming function is required, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect Clock.
Port Service Type
This parameter indicates the type of services that are processed in a path. It depends on the services that are transmitted in a path.
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the General Attributes tab.
A-268
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameter Port Name Enable Port Value Range Enabled Disabled Encapsulation Type Null 802.1Q QinQ
l
Description This parameter indicates the port name. This parameter specifies the port name. This parameter indicates the working mode of the port.
l
This parameter specifies the method of the port to process the received packets. If you set this parameter to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. If you set this parameter to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1q standard. If you set this parameter to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-269
Parameter Working Mode
Value Range Auto-Negotiation 10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex
Default Value Auto-Negotiation
Description
l
The Ethernet ports of different types support different working modes. When the equipment on the opposite side works in auto-negotiation mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to Auto-Negotiation. When the equipment on the opposite side works in full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M FullDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. When the equipment on the opposite side works in half-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M HalfDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, or AutoNegotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. The GE optical interface supports the 1000M full-duplex mode only.
Max Frame Length (byte)
1518 to 9600
1522
The value of this parameter should be greater than the length of any frame to be transported.
A-270
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Auto-Negotiation Enable
Value Range Auto-Negotiation 10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex
Default Value 100M Full-Duplex
Description
l
This parameter specifies the autonegotiation capability of the Ethernet port. This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to AutoNegotiation. This parameter specifies the attribute of the logical port. The SFP on the EM6F board supports the optical port and electrical port.
Logical Port Attribute
Optical Port Electrical Port
Optical Port
Physical Port Attribute
This parameter indicates the attribute of the physical port.
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control

This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Control tab.

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port name.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-271
Parameter Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Description
l
This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is not set to Auto-Negotiation. The nonautonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the nonautonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to AutoNegotiation. The auto-negotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the auto-negotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode
Disabled Enable Symmetric Flow Control
Disabled
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port name.
A-272
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter QinQ Type Domain
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description
l
This parameter specifies the QinQ type domain. When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed. QinQ Type Domain should be set to the same value for all the ports on the EM6T/ EM6F boardor the EM4T/EM4F logical board.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-273
Parameter TAG
Value Range Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Default Value Tag Aware
Description
l
This parameter specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-1. If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), this parameter is set to Tag Aware. If all the accessed services are frames without the VLAN tag (untagged frames), this parameter is set to Access. If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, this parameter is set to Hybrid. This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. For details about the functions of this parameter, see Table A-1. This parameter is set according to the actual situations.
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4094
A-274
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter VLAN Priority
Value Range 0 to 7
Default Value 0
Description
l
This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. For details about the functions of this parameter, see Table A-1. When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, this parameter is set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames Port Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Untagged frame Processing Method Tag Aware The port receives the frame. The port discards the frame. Access The port discards the frame. The ports add the VLAN tag, to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame and receives the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame. The ports add the VLAN tag, to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame and receives the frame.
Ingress UNI
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-275
Port
Type of Data Frame Tagged frame
Processing Method Tag Aware The port transmits the frame. Access The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Hybrid
l
Egress UNI
If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameter Port Port Physical Parameters Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port name. This parameter indicates the physical parameters of the port.
A-276
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter MAC Loopback
Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop
Description
l
This parameter specifies the loopback state at the MAC layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter specifies the loopback state at the PHY layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet physical signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback Inloop
Non-Loopback
Loopback Check
This parameter specifies whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists on the port. This parameter specifies whether to enable the loop port shutdown function. This parameter specifies the egress PIR bandwidth. This parameter specifies whether to limit the traffic rate of the broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets. When the equipment at the opposite end may encounter a broadcast storm, this parameter is set to Enabled.
Loopback Port Shutdown Egress PIR Bandwidth (kbit/s) Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-277
Parameter Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
Default Value 30
Description When the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter, the received broadcast packets are discarded. The value of this parameter should be more than the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets before the broadcast storm occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set to 30% or higher.
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Port Name Port Mode Value Range Layer 2 Default Value Layer 2 Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port. This parameter indicates or specifies the customized port name. This parameter indicates the working mode of the Ethernet name.
A-278
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Encapsulation Type
Value Range Null 802.1Q QinQ
Default Value 802.1Q
Description
l
This parameter specifies the method of the port to process the received packets. If this parameter is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard.
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes

Parameter Port QinQ Type Domain Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port.
l
This parameter specifies the QinQ type domain. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to QinQ.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-279
Parameter Tag
Value Range Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Default Value Tag Aware
Description
l
This parameter specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details about the TAG flags and associated frame-processing methods, see Table A-2. If all the accessed services are frames that contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set this parameter to "Tag Aware". If all the accessed services are frames that do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set this parameter to "Access". If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to "Hybrid". This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. For details about the functions of this parameter, see Table A-2. This parameter needs to be set according to the actual situations. This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. For details about the functions of this parameter, see Table A-2. When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, this parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4094
VLAN Priority
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table A-2 Data frame processing Status Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Processing Method Tag Aware The port receives the frame. Access The port discards the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame.
Ingress Port
A-280
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Status
Type of Data Frame Untagged frame
Processing Method Tag Aware The port discards the frame. Access The port receives the frame after the VLAN tag that corresponds to "Default VLAN ID" and "VLAN Priority" are added to the frame. The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame after the VLAN tag that corresponds to "Default VLAN ID" and "VLAN Priority" are added to the frame.
l
Egress Port
Tagged frame
The port transmits the frame.
If the VLAN ID in the frame is "Default VLAN ID", the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. If the VLAN ID in the frame is not "Default VLAN ID", the port directly transmits the frame.
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes

Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-281
Parameter Radio Link ID
Default Value 1
Description
l
This parameter specifies the ID of the radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. The ID of each radio link of an NE must be unique, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link must be the same. This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match with the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the IF interface. Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. Inloop indicates that the IF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. Outloop indicates that the received SDH signals are looped back. Generally, this parameter is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to NonLoopback. This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status on the composite interface. Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. Inloop indicates that the composite signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. Outloop indicates that the received composite signals are looped back. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Received Radio Link ID
IF Port Loopback
Non-Loopback
Composite Port Loopback
Non-Loopback
A-282
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameter Error Frame Discard Enabled
Description
l
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to discard the Ethernet frame when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet frame. If the Ethernet service transmitted on the IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video service, you can set this parameter to Disabled. The IF1 board does not support this parameter. This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port. The IF1 board does not support this parameter. This parameter indicates the transmit rate of the local port. The IF1 board does not support this parameter. This parameter indicates the receive rate of the local port. The IF1 board does not support this parameter. This parameter specifies the loopback state at the MAC layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. The IF1 board does not support this parameter.
MAC Address
Transmitting Rate (Kbit/s)
Receiving Rate (Kbit/s)
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback Inloop
Non-Loopback
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
The IF port on the OptiX RTN 910 does not support the setting of this parameter.
A.15 Parameters for Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead. A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads (RSOHs). A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs). A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads (RSOHs).
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format

Parameter Display in Text Format Display in Hexadecimal Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Deselected Default Value Selected Description This parameter specifies the display in the text format. This parameter specifies the display in the hexadecimal format.

Parameter Object J0 to be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set according to the J0 byte to be received at the opposite end.
l
J0 to be Received ([Mode]Content)
[Disabled]
This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be received. If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J0 byte. It is recommended that you use the default value.
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1. 2. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.

Parameters for the Trace Byte J1

Parameter Object J1 to be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, this parameter is set according to the J1 byte to be received at the opposite end.
l
J1 to be Received ([Mode]Content)
[Disabled]
If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J1 byte. It is recommended that you use the default value.
Parameters for the Signal Flag C2

Parameter Object C2 to be Sent Value Range Default Value (0x00)Unequipped Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set according to the C2 byte to be received at the opposite end. If the NE at the local end reports the HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set according to the C2 byte to be sent at the opposite end.
C2 to be Received
(0x00)Unequipped
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-285
Parameters for Overhead Termination

Parameter Object VC4 Overhead Termination Value Range Termination Pass-Through Auto
l
Default Value Auto
Description This parameter indicates the object to be set.

l
If this parameter is set to Pass-Through, the NE forwards the original overhead after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead regardless of the C2 byte. If this parameter is set to Termination, the NE generates the new VC-4 path overhead according to the board setting after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead regardless of the C2 byte. If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4 path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through service is passed through, and the VC-4 path overhead in the VC-12 service is terminated. It is recommended that you use the default value.
A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
2.

A-286
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Parameters for the Trace Byte

Parameter Object J2 to be Sent Value Range Default Value [16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set according to the J2 byte to be received by the NE at the opposite end.
l
J2 to be Received
[Disabled]
If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J2 byte. It is recommended that you use the default value.
J2 Received
This parameter displays the J2 byte that is actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag

Parameter Object Signal Label (L1,L2,L3 of V5) to be Sent Signal Label (L1,L2,L3 of V5) to be Received Signal Label (L1,L2,L3 of V5) Received Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this parameter is set according to the V5 byte to be received at the opposite end. If the NE at the local end reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this parameter is set according to the V5 byte to be sent at the opposite end. This parameter displays the V5 byte that is actually received.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
A-287
B Board Loopback Types
B
Board SL1D
l l l
Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types. Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards Loopback Type Supports the optical interface inloop Supports the optical interface outloop Supports the VC-4 path inloop Supports the VC-4 path outloop Supports the tributary inloop Supports the tributary outloop The SP3S and SP3D boards described in this topic include the physical SP3S and SP3D boards and the logical SP3S and SP3D boards that the physical CSTA, CSHA, CHSB, and CHSC boards map. The EM4T/EM4F is the logical Ethernet board mapping the physical Ethernet board CSHA/ CSHB/CSHC. Remarks The SL1D boards described in this topic include the physical SL1D board and the logical SL1D board that the physical CSTA/CSHC board maps.
SP3S and SP3D
EM4T and EM4F EM6T and EM6F
Supports the Ethernet port inloop at the MAC layer Supports the Ethernet port inloop at the PHY layer Supports the IF port inloop Supports the IF port outloop Supports the composite port inloop Supports the composite port outloop
IF1
l l l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
B-1
B Board Loopback Types
Board IFU2
Loopback Type
l l l
Remarks -
Supports the IF port inloop Supports the IF port outloop Supports the composite port inloop Supports the composite port outloop Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports Supports the IF port inloop Supports the IF port outloop Supports the composite port inloop Supports the composite port outloop Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports
IFX2
l l l
B-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
C
Indicators of Boards
Indicator STAT
Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
PROG
On for 100 ms (green) and off for 100 ms repeatedly On for 300 ms (green) and off for 300 ms repeatedly On (green) On for 100 ms (red) and off for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or being reset, the software is being loaded to the flash memory. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board software is in BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
C-1
Indicator
State On (red)
Meaning When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic file or upper layer software is lost. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off SYNC On (green) On (red) SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LOS1 On (red) Off LOS2 On (red) Off
The software is running normally. The clock is normal. The clock source is lost or is switched. The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs on the board. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. The first optical interface on the line reports the R_LOS alarm. The first optical interface on the line does not report the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface on the line reports the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface on the line does not report the R_LOS alarm.
Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
PROG
On for 100 ms (green) and off for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or being reset, the software is being loaded to the flash memory.
C-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Indicator
State On for 300 ms (green) and off for 300 ms repeatedly On (green) On for 100 ms (red) and off for 100 ms repeatedly On (red)
Meaning When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board software is in BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic file or upper layer software is lost. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off SYNC On (green) On (red) SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off
The software is running normally. The clock is normal. The clock source is lost or is switched. The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs on the board. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system.
Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
PROG
On for 100 ms (green) and off for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or being reset, the software is being loaded to the flash memory.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
C-3
Indicator
State On for 300 ms (green) and off for 300 ms repeatedly On (green) On for 100 ms (red) and off for 100 ms repeatedly On (red)
Meaning When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board software is in BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic file or upper layer software is lost. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off SYNC On (green) On (red) SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LINK1 On (green) Off ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) Off LINK2 On (green) Off ACT2 On or blinking (yellow) Off LOS1 On (red) Off
The software is running normally. The clock is normal. The clock source is lost or is switched. The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs on the board. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. The port connection is normal. The port connection is interrupted. The data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. The port connection is normal. The port connection is interrupted. The data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. The first optical interface on the line reports the R_LOS alarm. The first optical interface on the line does not report the R_LOS alarm.
C-4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Indicator LOS2
State On (red) Off
Meaning The second optical interface on the line reports the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface on the line does not report the R_LOS alarm.
Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
SRV
On (green) On (red)
The services are normal. Indicates that a critical or major alarm occurs in the service. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The space link is normal. The space link is faulty. The ODU works normally.
l
On (yellow) Off LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red)
On (yellow) On for 300 ms (yellow) and off for 300 ms repeatedly RMT On (yellow)
The ODU has minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The equipment at the opposite end reports an RDI.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
C-5
Indicator
State Off
Meaning The equipment at the opposite end does not report an RDI.
l
ACT
On (green)
Off
Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
SRV
On (green) On (red)
The services are normal. Indicates that a critical or major alarm occurs in the service. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The space link is normal. The space link is faulty. The ODU works normally.
On (yellow) Off LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green)
C-6
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Indicator
State On (red)
Meaning
l
l
ACT
On (green)
Off
Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
SRV
On (green) On (red) On (yellow)
The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
C-7
Indicator
State Off
Meaning There is no power supplied to the system. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the software is being loaded to the flash memory. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board software is in BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading the upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic file or upper layer software is lost. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
PROG
Off LINK1a On (green) Blinking (yellow) Off LINK2a On (green) Flashing (green) Off
The software is running normally. The GE1 interface is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 interface is receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 interface is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE2 interface is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 interface is receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 interface is not connected or is connected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the corresponding GE optical interfaces.
C-8
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
SRV
On (green) On (red)
The services are normal. Indicates that a critical or major alarm occurs in the service. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The first optical interface of the SL1D reports the R_LOS alarm. The first optical interface of the SL1D does not report the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SL1D reports the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SL1D does not report the R_LOS alarm.
On (yellow) Off LOS1 On (red)
Off
LOS2
On (red)
Off
Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
C-9
Indicator
State Off
Meaning
l l l
SRV
On (green) On (red)
The services are normal. Indicates that a critical or major alarm occurs in the service. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
On (yellow) Off
Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l
SRV
The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs on the board. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system.
Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators Indicator PWRA Status On (green) Off Description The power supply is connected. There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power supply is connected incorrectly.
C-10
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Indicator PWRB
Status On (green) Off
Description The power supply is connected. There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power supply is connected incorrectly.
Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators Indicator FAN State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The fan is running normally. The fan is faulty. The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards Boards CSTA CSHA CSHB CSHC IF1 IFU2 IFX2 EM6T EM6F SL1D SP3S SP3D PIU FAN 1.08 kg 1.11 kg 1.16 kg 1.13 kg 0.72 kg 0.79 kg 0.80 kg 0.37 kg 0.38 kg 0.30 kg 0.54 kg 0.64 kg 0.12 kg 0.20 kg Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) < 13.6 W < 18.0 W < 22.7 W < 19.6 W < 12 W < 23 W < 33 W < 10.4 W < 11.3 W < 3.4 W < 5.7 W < 9.6 W < 0.5 W < 2.3 W (room temperature) < 17 W (high temperature)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
C-11
D Glossary
D
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. Number 1U 1+1 protection
Glossary
The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/ 1.75 in.) A radio link protection system composed of one working channel and one protection channel. Two ODUs and two IF boards are used at each end of a radio link.
A Adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode based on the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services. A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal to/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network. A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
Add/Drop multiplexer Adjacent channel alternate polarization
Automatic A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit transmit power signal detected at the receiver. control
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
D-1
D Glossary
Co-channel dual polarization Cross polarization interference cancellation
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The cochannel dual polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization. A technology used in the case of the co-channel dual polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
D DC-I A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is shortcircuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier. An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized.
Digital modulation Dual-polarized antenna
E Equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading. A symptom that the quality of the transmitted information is degraded because some bits of a data stream are errored after being received, decided, and regenerated.
Bit error
F Forward error correction Frequency diversity A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
D-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
D Glossary
Gateway network element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer.
H Hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.
I Indoor Unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast Management groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent Protocol multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. Intermediate frequency IGMP snooping The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
L Layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch. The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network. An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferred signals.
LCT Link aggregation group Trail
M Multiplex section protection The function performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
D-3
D Glossary
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MSTP is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol and the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, and was introduced in IEEE 802.1s as amendment to 802.1Q, 1998 edition. Standard IEEE 802.1Q-2003 now includes MSTP.
N N+1 protection Network element A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels and one protection channel. A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control Unit. The network management system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
Network management system Non-gateway network element
O Orderwire Outdoor unit A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.
P Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Polarization A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
D-4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
D Glossary
QinQ
A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
R Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.
S Single polarized antenna Space diversity An antenna that can transmit only one channel of polarized electromagnetic waves. A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used. An algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.1D. It configures the active topology of a Bridged LAN of arbitrary topology into a single spanning tree. A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of network management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets. A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. A hierarchical set of synchronous digital transport, multiplexing, and cross-connect structures, which is standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.
Spanning Tree Protocol Subnet Subnetwork connection protection Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
U U2000 A unified network management system developed by Huawei. It can support all the NE level and network level management functions, and can manage the transport network, access network, and MAN Ethernet in a unified manner.
V Virtual LAN An end-to-end logical network that can travel through several network segments or networks by using the network management software based on the switch LAN. The IEEE 802.1Q is the main standard for the virtual LAN.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
D-5
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
E
A ADC AGC APS ARP ASK ATPC AU
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order.
Analog Digit Converter Automatic Gain Control Automatic Protection Switching Address Resolution Protocol Amplitude Shift Keying Automatic Transmit Power Control Administrative Unit
B BER BIOS BIP BPDU BSC Bit Error Rate Basic Input Output System Bit-Interleaved Parity Bridge Protocol Data Unit Base Station Controller
C CAR CBS CCDP CF CGMP

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Committed Access Rate Committed Burst Size Co-Channel Dual Polarization Compact Flash card Cisco Group Management Protocol
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. E-1
CIR CIST CoS CPU CRC CVLAN C-VLAN
Committed Information Rate Common and Internal Spanning Tree Class of Service Central Processing Unit Cyclic Redundancy Check Customer VLAN Customer VLAN
D DC DCC DCN DSCP DVMRP Direct Current Data Communications Channel Data Communication Network Differentiated Services Code Point Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E ECC E-LAN EMC EMI ERPS ES-IS ETSI Embedded Control Channel Ethernet-LAN Electromagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic Interference Ethernet Ring Protection Switching End System to Intermediate System European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F FCS FD FE FEC FIFO FLP FPGA Frame Check Sequence Frequency Diversity Fast Ethernet Forward Error Correction First In First Out Fast Link Pulse Field Programmable Gate Array
E-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
G GE GFP GTS GUI Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure Generic Traffic Shaping Graphical User Interface
H HDB3 HDLC HSB HSM High Density Bipolar Code 3 High level Data Link Control procedure Hot Standby Hitless Switch Mode
I ICMP IDU IEC IEEE IETF IF IGMP IP IPv6 IS-IS ISO ITU-T IVL Internet Control Message Protocol Indoor Unit International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers The Internet Engineering Task Force Intermediate Frequency Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol Internet Protocol version 6 Intermediate System to Intermediate System International Standard Organization International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector Independence VLAN learning
L LAN LAPD
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Local Area Network Link Access Procedure on the D channel

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. E-3
LAG LAPS LB LCT LDPC LMSP LPT
Link Aggregation Group Link Access Procedure-SDH LoopBack Generation-Local Craft Terminal Low-Density Parity Check code Linear Multiplex Section Protection Link State Pass Through
M MA MAC MADM MBS MD MDI MEP MIB MP MSP MSTP MTBF MTTR MTU Maintenance Association Medium Access Control Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer Maximum Burst Size Maintenance Domain Medium Dependent Interface Maintenance End Point Management Information Base Maintenance Point Multiplex Section Protection Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Mean Time Between Failure Mean Time To Repair Maximum Transmission Unit
N NE NLP NMS NNI NSAP Network Element Normal Link Pulse Network Management System Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface Network Service Access Point
E-4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OAM ODU OSI OSPF
Operations, Administration and Maintenance Outdoor Unit Open Systems Interconnection Open Shortest Path First
P PDH PIM-DM PIM-SM PIR PPP PRBS Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode Peak Information Rate Point-to-Point Protocol Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
Q QinQ QoS QPSK 802.1Q in 802.1Q Quality of Service Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
R RF RFC RIP RMON RNC RS RSL RSSI RSTP RTN Radio Frequency Request For Comment Routing Information Protocol Remote Monitoring Radio Network Controller Reed-Solomon encoding Received Signal Level Received Signal Strength Indicator Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Radio Transmission Node
S SD Space Diversity
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
E-5
SDH SFP SNC SNCP SNMP SNR SP SSM STM STM-1 STM-1e STM-1o STM-N STP SVL
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Small Form-Factor Pluggable SubNetwork Connection Sub-Network Connection Protection Simple Network Management Protocol Signal-to-Noise Ratio Strict Priority Synchronization Status Message Synchronous Transport Module SDH Transport Module -1 STM-1 Electrical Interface STM-1 Optical Interface SDH Transport Module -N Spanning Tree Protocol Shared VLAN Learning
T TCI TCP TDM TMN TU Tag Control Information Transfer Control Protocol Time Division Multiplex Telecommunication Management Network Tributary Unit
U UDP UNI User Datagram Protocol User-Network Interface
V VC VC12 VC-12 VC3 Virtual Container Virtual Container -12 Virtual Container -12 Virtual Container -3
E-6
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
VC-3 VC4 VC-4 VCG VLAN VoIP VPN
Virtual Container -3 Virtual Container -4 Virtual Container -4 Virtual Concatenation Group Virtual LAN Voice over IP Virtual Private Network
W WAN WRR WTR Wide Area Network Weighted Round Robin Wait to Restore Time
X XPD XPIC Cross-Polarization Discrimination Cross-polarization Interference Cancellation
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
E-7

Huawei OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Huawei OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System V100R002C00

IDU Hardware Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

Basics of digital microwave communication Basics of the OptiX RTN 910

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

Updates in Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

Section 5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment

Updates in Issue 02 (2009-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-17

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

1.1 Network Application

STM-1/E1 Regional Backhaul Network

OptiX RTN 910

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

E1 Regional backhaul network GE

OptiX RTN 910

Performance 1U Supported 1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

Item RF configuration mode

Figure 1-3 IDU 910

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

Microwave modulation mode

QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM (SP) QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM (SPA)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

Figure 1-4 Direct mounting

1.3 Configuration Modes

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description

PDH microwave equipment

Low capacity for PDH ODU

SDH microwave equipment

Standard power ODU or high power ODU

Hybrid microwave equipment XPIC Hybrid microwave equipment